JVC GY HM170E HM200U/GY HM200E/GY HM170U/GY User Manual HM170E, HM170U, HM200E, HM200U B5A 0573 00

GY-HM200E GY-HM200E, GY-HM200U B5A-0573-00 nglish, INSTRUCTIONS

GY-HM170U, GY-HM200U GY-HM170U, GY-HM200U

GY HM170E | HM170U - Operating Instructions GY-HM200_170EN Free User Guide for JVC Camcorder, Manual - page2

User Manual: JVC GY-HM170E GY-HM170E, GY-HM170U, GY-HM200E, GY-HM200U nglish, INSTRUCTIONS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 184 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

.
4K MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
GY-HM200U/GY-HM200E
GY-HM170U/GY-HM170E
INSTRUCTIONS
.
The illustration here shows how the handle unit is attached using the unit supplied with
GY-HM200U/GY-HM200E.
GY-HM170U/GY-HM170E do not come with a handle unit.
The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement
without prior notice.
Please check the latest version of the INSTRUCTIONS from the following Mobile User Guide. You can
also download the PDF from the Mobile User Guide.
Mobile User Guide
When you are outside, you can refer to the instructions from your Android phone or iPhone.
http://manual3.jvckenwood.com/pro/mobile/global/
You can view the Mobile User Guide using the browser on your Android phone or iPhone.
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product.
Before operating this unit, please read the
instructions carefully to ensure the best
possible performance.
In this manual, each model number is
described without the last letter (U/E) which
means the shipping destination.
(U: for USA and Canada, E: for Europe)
Only “U” models (GY-HM200U/GY-HM170U)
have been evaluated by UL.
Please read the following before getting started:
For Customer Use:
Model No.
Serial No.
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the body.
Retain this information for future reference.
GY-HM200U/GY-HM170U
IM 1.00 B5A-0573-00
2
.
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
4. Follow all instructions.
5.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with dry cloth.
7.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
These are general IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS and certain items may not
apply to all appliances.
3. Heed all warnings.
FOR USA
9.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
10. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
11. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the
cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as
power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not
operate normally, or has been dropped.
For USA-California Only
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
CAN ICES-3 A / NMB-3 A
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS 3
Introduction
Safety Precautions
.
CAUTION
FOR USA AND CANADA
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with
arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that
may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a
risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within
an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to
the presence of important
operating and maintenance
(servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying
the appliance.
RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
.
This device complies with Part 15 of
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not
approved by JVC could void the
user’s authority to operate the
equipment. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial
environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required
to correct the interference at his own
expense.
4Safety Precautions
Introduction
.
POUR CANADA
RISQUE
D’ELECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION:
The mains plug shall remain readily
operable.
Remove the mains plug immediately if
the camera functions abnormally.
WARNING:
The battery pack, the camera with
battery installed, and the remote control
with battery installed should not be
exposed to excessive heat such as direct
sunlight, fire or the like.
ATTENTION:
POUR EVITER TOUT RISQUE
D’ELECTROCUTION NE PAS
OUVRIR LE BOITER. AUCUNE
PIECE INTERIEURE N’EST A
REGLER PAR L’UTILISATEUR. SE
REFERER A UN AGENT QUALIFIE
EN CAS DE PROBLEME.
ATTENTION
Le symbole de l’éclair à
l’intérieur d’un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à
alerter l’utilisateur sur la
présence d’une “tension
dangereuse” non isolée dans
le boîtier du produit. Cette
tension est suffisante pour
provoquer l’électrocution de
personnes.
Le point d’exclamation à
l’intérieur d’un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à
alerter l’utilisateur sur la
présence d’opérations
d’entretien importantes au
sujet desquelles des
renseignements se trouvent
dans le manuel
d’instructions.
Ces symboles ne sont
utilisés qu’aux Etats-Unis.
.
Safety Precautions 5
Introduction
.
When the equipment is installed in a
cabinet or on a shelf, make sure that it
has sufficient space on all sides to allow
for ventilation (10 cm (3-15/16") or more
on both sides, on top and at the rear).
Do not block the ventilation holes.
(If the ventilation holes are blocked by a
newspaper, or cloth etc. the heat may not
be able to get out.)
No naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, should be placed on the
apparatus.
When discarding batteries,
environmental problems must be
considered and the local rules or laws
governing the disposal of these batteries
must be followed strictly.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to
dripping or splashing and that no objects
filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be
placed on the apparatus.
Do not point the lens directly into the
sun. This can cause eye injuries, as well
as lead to the malfunctioning of internal
circuitry. There is also a risk of fire or
electric shock.
CAUTION!
The following notes concern possible
physical damage to this unit and to the
user.
Carrying or holding this unit by the LCD
monitor can result in dropping the unit,
or in a malfunction.
Do not use a tripod on unsteady or
unlevel surfaces. It could tip over,
causing serious damage to the unit.
CAUTION!
Connecting cables (Audio/Video, etc.) to
this unit and leaving it on top of the TV is
not recommended, as tripping on the
cables will cause the unit to fall, resulting
in damage.
.
When using the AC adapter in
areas other than the USA
The provided AC adapter features
automatic voltage selection in the AC
range from 110 V to 240 V.
USING HOUSEHOLD AC PLUG
ADAPTER
In case of connecting the unit’s power
cord to an AC wall outlet other than
American National Standard C73 series
type, use an AC plug adapter called a
“Siemens Plug” as shown.
For this AC plug adapter, please contact
the local dealers in your area.
Remove the AC adapter from the AC
wall outlet when not in use.
Do not leave dust or metal objects
adhered to the AC wall outlet or AC
adapter (power/DC plug).
Plug Adapter
6Safety Precautions
Introduction
.
IMPORTANT (for owners in the U.K.)
Connection to the mains supply in
the United Kingdom.
DO NOT cut off the mains plug from
this equipment.
If the plug fitted is not suitable for the
power points in your home or the cable is
too short to reach a power point, then
obtain an appropriate safety approved
extension lead or contact the local
dealers in your area.
BE SURE to replace the fuse only with
an identical approved type, as originally
fitted, and to replace the fuse cover.
If nonetheless the mains plug is cut off
be sure to remove the fuse and dispose
of the plug immediately, to avoid possible
shock hazard by inadvertent connection
to the mains supply.
If this product is not supplied fitted with a
mains plug then follow the instructions
given below:
DO NOT make any connection to the
Larger Terminal coded E or Green.
The wires in the mains lead are coloured
in accordance with the following code:
If these colours do not correspond with
the terminal identifications of your plug,
connect as follows:
Blue wire to terminal coded N (Neutral)
or coloured black.
Brown wire to terminal coded L (Live) or
coloured Red.
If in doubt — consult a competent
electrician.
CAUTIONS:
To prevent shock, do not open the
cabinet. No user serviceable parts
inside.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
When you are not using the AC
adapter for a long period of time, it is
recommended that you disconnect the
power cord from AC outlet.
Blue to N
(Neutral) or Black
Brown to L (Live)
or Red
.
FOR EUROPE
This equipment is in conformity with the
provisions and protection requirements of
the corresponding European Directives.
This equipment is designed for professional
video appliances and can be used in the
following environments:
Controlled EMC environment (for
example, purpose-built broadcasting or
recording studio), and rural outdoors
environments.
In order to keep the best performance and
furthermore for electromagnetic
compatibility we recommend to use cables
not exceeding the following lengths:
The inrush current of this apparatus is
11.0 A.
Exclusive
Cable
Exclusive
Cable
Exclusive
Cable
Exclusive
Cable
Coaxial
Cable
Shielded
Cable
Shielded
Cable
Shielded
Cable
Shielded
Cable
DC 1.8 m
1.4 m
1.2 m
1.8 m
2 m
2 m
3 m
1 m
1 m
USB Mini
AV OUT
HDMI
REMOTE
SDI OUT K
AUX
HEADPHONE
AUDIO INPUT 1/2
O
Port Cable Length
CAUTION:
Where there are strong electromagnetic
waves or magnetism, for example near a
radio or TV transmitter, transformer,
motor, etc., the picture and the sound
may be disturbed. In such case, please
keep the apparatus away from the
sources of the disturbance.
Safety Precautions 7
Introduction
.
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic
environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user
may be required to take adequate
measures.
CAUTION:
To avoid electric
shock or damage to
the unit, first firmly
insert the small end
of the power cord into the AC Adapter
until it is no longer wobbly, and then plug
the larger end of the power cord in to an
AC outlet.
FOR EUROPE
.
The plastics packaging bags may cause
suffocation when they are covered over the
head. Tear them open, and keep them away
from the reach of infants and children by
ensuring that they are disposed of properly.
.
Dear Customer
This apparatus is in conformance with
the valid European directives and
standards regarding electromagnetic
compatibility and electrical safety.
European representative of
JVC KENWOOD Corporation is:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Konrad-Adenauer-Allee 1-11
61118 Bad Vilbel
Germany
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte
Kundin, dieses Gerät stimmt mit den
gültigen europäischen Richtlinien und
Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer
Verträglichkeit und elektrischer
Sicherheit überein.
Die europäische Vertretung für die
JVC KENWOOD Corporation ist:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Konrad-Adenauer-Allee 1-11
61118 Bad Vilbel
Deutschland
8Safety Precautions
Introduction
.
Battery Pack
The supplied battery pack is a lithium-ion
battery. Before using the supplied battery
pack or an optional battery pack, be sure
to read the following cautions:
To avoid hazards
... do not burn.
To prevent damage and prolong
service life
... do not subject to unnecessary shock.
... charge within the temperature range
of 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F). Cooler
temperatures require longer charging
time, or in some cases stop charging
at all. Warmer temperatures prevent
complete charging, or in some cases
stop charging at all.
... store in a cool, dry place. Extended
exposure to high temperatures will
increase natural discharge and
shorten service life.
... keep a 30% battery level if the
battery pack is not to be used for a
long period of time.
... remove from charger or powered unit
when not in use, as some machines
use current even when switched off.
... do not drop or subject to strong
impact.
... do not short-circuit the
terminals. Keep it away
from metallic objects
when not in use.
When transporting,
carry the battery in a
plastic bag.
... do not modify or
disassemble.
... do not expose the
battery to
temperatures
exceeding 60°C (140°F), as this may
cause the battery to overheat, explode
or catch fire.
... use only specified chargers.
Terminals
Terminals
K
M
.
Para Brasil
Informação sobre eliminação de
baterias
Este produto não deverá ser eliminado
como lixo doméstico em geral.
Devolva a bateria velha ao comerciante
ou para a rede autorizada, para que seja
devolvida ao fabricante ou importador.
A reciclagem e eliminação de lixo em
uma maneira adequada, ajudarão para
preservar recursos, prevenindo, ao
mesmo tempo, contra efeitos prejudiciais
sobre a nossa saúde e o meio ambiente.
o
Para Retirar a Bateria Recarregável
Pressione botão e puxe a bateria para fora.
.
GY-HM200U/GY-HM200E
GY-HM170U/GY-HM170E
Empurre
Empurre
Safety Precautions 9
Introduction
Contents
Introduction
Safety Precautions ............................................ 4
Contents .......................................................... 10
Main Features ................................................. 12
Precautions for Proper Use ............................. 14
Operation Modes ............................................. 18
Names of Parts ................................................ 20
Side Control Panel ....................................... 21
Side Terminal Section .................................. 22
Rear Terminal .............................................. 22
LCD Monitor ................................................ 23
Handle Unit K .......................................... 24
Lens Section ................................................ 25
Basic System Diagram .................................... 26
Preparations
Settings and Adjustments Before Use ............. 27
Attaching the Handle Unit K .................... 27
Adjusting the Grip Belt ................................. 27
Attaching the External Microphone O ...... 27
Attaching/Detaching the Lens Cap .............. 28
Attaching/Detaching the Hood ..................... 28
Attaching the Tripod ..................................... 29
Power Supply .................................................. 29
Using a Battery Pack .................................... 29
Using AC Power (DC IN Power) ................... 31
Power Status Display ...................................... 31
Turning On/Off the Power ................................ 32
Initial Settings .................................................. 33
Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder .. 35
Display Screen ............................................. 35
Status Screen .............................................. 36
USB Mode Screen ....................................... 36
Remote Edit Mode Screen K ................... 36
Warning Display ........................................... 36
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder ...... 37
Adjusting the LCD Monitor ........................... 37
Adjusting the Viewfinder .............................. 38
Assignment of Functions to User Buttons ........ 39
Tally Lamp ....................................................... 39
SD Card ........................................................... 40
Usable Cards ............................................... 40
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards ................ 42
Restoring the SD Card ................................. 43
Clips Recorded to SD Cards ........................ 44
Operation Lock Feature ................................... 45
Shooting
Basic Shooting Procedures ............................. 46
Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video
Format ............................................................. 47
Zoom Operation .............................................. 49
Focus Operation .............................................. 50
Adjusting the Focusing by Face Detection ...... 53
Adjusting the Brightness .................................. 54
Adjusting the Iris .............................................. 55
Setting the Gain ............................................... 57
Setting the Electronic Shutter .......................... 58
Setting the ND Filter ........................................ 59
Adjusting the White Balance ............................ 60
Adjusting the Camera Image ........................... 64
Using the Image Stabilizer ............................... 64
Audio Recording .............................................. 65
Monitoring Audio Sound During Recording Using a
Headphone ...................................................... 67
Time Code and User’s Bit ................................ 68
Setting Time Code Generator .......................... 69
Setting the User’s Bit ....................................... 71
Setting Zebra Pattern ...................................... 72
Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip
Review) ........................................................... 73
Recording Simultaneously at Two Different
Definitions ....................................................... 74
Series Rec ....................................................... 74
Dual Rec .......................................................... 74
Backup Rec ..................................................... 76
Special Recording ........................................... 78
Pre Rec ........................................................ 78
Clip Continuous Rec .................................... 79
Frame Rec ................................................... 80
Interval Rec .................................................. 81
Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter Trig) ....... 82
Playback
Playing Recorded Clips ................................... 83
Thumbnail Screen ........................................ 83
Actions ......................................................... 85
Playing back ................................................ 86
Deleting Clips .................................................. 87
Appending/Deleting OK Mark .......................... 88
Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple
Clips ................................................................ 89
Selecting Multiple Clips Randomly ............... 89
Selecting Multiple Clips Consecutively ........ 90
Trimming Recorded Clips ................................ 91
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Basic Operations in Menu Screen ................... 92
Display and Description of the Menu Screen
..................................................................... 93
10 Contents
Introduction
Text Input with Software Keyboard .............. 94
Menu Screen Hierarchical Chart ..................... 95
Camera Function Menu ................................... 96
User Switch Set Item .................................... 98
Camera Process Menu .................................. 100
Detail/Adjust Item ....................................... 102
White Balance Item .................................... 102
TC/UB Menu ................................................. 103
LCD/VF Menu ................................................ 104
Shooting Assist Item .................................. 105
Marker Settings Item .................................. 106
Display Settings Item ................................. 107
A/V Set Menu ................................................ 109
Video Set Item ........................................... 109
Audio Set Item ........................................... 110
System Menu ................................................ 113
Record Set Item ......................................... 114
Network/Settings Item K ........................ 118
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items
(Favorites Menu) ........................................... 123
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu ...... 123
Editing Favorites Menu .............................. 124
Display/Status Screen
Display Screen in Camera Mode ................... 127
Display Screen in Media Mode ...................... 132
Status Screen ................................................ 134
Camera Features
Marker and Safety Zone Displays (Camera Mode
Only) .............................................................. 135
Color Bar Output ........................................... 135
Configuring Setup Files ................................. 136
Saving Setup Files ..................................... 136
Loading a Setup File .................................. 137
Connecting External Devices
Connecting External Monitor ......................... 138
Connecting the Headphone ........................... 139
Connecting Wired Remote Control ................ 140
Loading Clips to the PC ................................. 140
Connecting to the Network K
Functions of Network Connection K .......... 142
Preparing Network Connection K .............. 142
Operating Environment .............................. 142
Camera Setup for Network Connection ..... 143
Connecting via Wireless LAN .................... 143
Connecting via Wired LAN ......................... 145
Connecting via Cellular Adapter ................ 145
Importing Metadata K ............................... 146
Preparing Metadata ................................... 146
Configuring the Server for Downloading .... 146
Importing Metadata .................................... 147
Uploading a Recorded Video Clip K ......... 148
Configuring the FTP Server for Uploading . 148
Uploading Video Clip ................................. 148
Connecting from a Web Browser K ........... 150
Editing Metadata K ................................... 151
Planning Metadata ..................................... 151
Clip Metadata ............................................ 152
Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser
K ............................................................... 155
View Remote Feature K ............................ 158
Operating Procedure ................................. 158
Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom ............. 159
Camera Control Function K ...................... 161
Configuring Settings via a Browser K ........ 162
Changing View Remote Function Settings . 163
Changing Connection Setup ...................... 164
Changing Metadata Server Settings .......... 165
Changing Clip Server Settings ................... 165
Changing Streaming Settings .................... 165
Managing the Network Connection Settings File
K ............................................................... 165
Saving the Connection Settings File .......... 165
Reading the Connection Settings File ........ 166
Deleting Connection Settings .................... 167
Performing Live Streaming K .................... 167
Setting Distribution ..................................... 168
Starting Distribution ................................... 169
Others
Error Messages and Actions ......................... 170
List of FTP Transfer Errors K ................. 171
List of Live Streaming Error Displays K . 173
Blinking of the Tally Lamp .......................... 174
Warning Tone ............................................ 174
Troubleshooting ............................................ 174
Specifications ................................................ 176
Index ............................................................. 180
Software License Agreement ........................ 182
Important Notice concerning the Software ..... 183
.
Contents 11
Introduction
Main Features
Supports 4K high-definition recording,
realizing more advanced Full HD
recording quality
Recording and playback at 30p/25p/24p are
possible in 4K resolution (3840x2160 pixels),
which contains information that is about four times
larger than Full HD. And with the H.264 codec, this
camera recorder supports high resolution 4K
recording at 150 Mbps and high quality HD
recording at 50 Mbps 4:2:2. Even when recording
scenes with a lot of movements and fine details, it
is possible to record high quality videos that are
smooth and rich in details.
F1.2, 29.6 mm wide-angle, 12x optical
zoom lens
A new lens has been developed, which boasts top-
notch brightness (maximum aperture of F1.2) for a
compact handheld camera. The bright lens allows
details to be reproduced clearly even in a dimly-lit
room.
The 12x optical zoom supports zooming from 29.6
mm at the wide-angle end, and dynamic zoom up
to 24x with the use of a high-resolution sensor
(during HD/SD recording), allowing the faces of
distant portrait subjects to be captured.
High-performance CMOS sensor with a
sensitivity of F5.6
This camera recorder is built in with a high-
performance 1/2.3-inch (effective pixels of 9.03
megapixels, 1/2.5-inch) CMOS sensor with a
resolution of 12.4 megapixels, achieving a
significantly enhanced sensitivity of F5.6 with the
high-definition and advanced noise-reduction
technology. You can produce recordings with
excellent gradation even when shooting in a low-
light scene or at a location where lighting cannot be
used.
New-generation JVC image processor
“FALCONBRID II”
The image processor employed supports both 4K
codec developed by JVC and simultaneous dual
stream encoding, achieving a high image quality
that maximizes the potential of next-generation
high-resolution sensors.
Enhanced network functions K
An encoding bit rate higher than existing models
can be set. Also, with the “Zixi” cloud service
supported, which enables highly-reliable and
stable data transmission, RTMP live streaming is
made possible.
Supports QuickTime and AVCHD
formats
Inheriting the concept of our past memory camera
recorders, this camera recorder supports
QuickTime (MOV) and AVCHD file formats that can
be directly edited on “Final Cut Pro”, an editing
software from Apple Inc.
Equipped with double SD card slots
allowing various recording options
The most common SDHC/SDXC card recording
system is used as the memory card. This ensures
high reliability and operation at low running cost.
Various user friendly recording options are
available. These include series recording which
enables seamless long hour continuous
recordings over the slots, dual recording of the
same file to two slots, and backup recording of
recording only the preferred scenes to one slot
using the record and stop operations while the
other slot is continuously recording.
In addition, Web files with resolution suitable for
distribution over the network can be created. HD
files and Web files can also be recorded
simultaneously.
For GY-HM200U/GY-HM200E, it is also possible
to perform streaming while the recording is
ongoing.
Equipped with progressive-compatible
3G-SDI and HDMI output
[SDI OUT] and [HDMI] terminals are equipped for
digital output. 3G-compatible SDI output is
supported, and external output including 4K from
the [HDMI] terminal is possible. Uncompressed
Full HD signals and audio signals can be output
simultaneously from the [SDI OUT] and [HDMI]
terminals.
* GY-HM170U/GY-HM170E come only with the
[HDMI] terminal. [SDI OUT] terminal is not
available.
12 Main Features
Introduction
3.5-inch 920K-pixel LCD display, 0.24-
inch 1.56-megapixel color viewfinder
The 3.5-inch 16:9 LCD display and 0.24-inch 16:9
LCOS color viewfinder provides support for critical
focusing during 4K shooting. Other assist functions
are also available, including magnified focus on a
manually selected point.
Auto focus/Optical image stabilizer
The camera recorder is equipped with a face
detection auto focus function that covers the entire
screen. Switching to manual focus is also possible.
A built-in optical image stabilizer feature is also
available.
Professional-style switch layout and
diverse video parameters
Switches for Gain and White Balance are available
on the side panel to enable quick switching
according to the shooting scene. Image quality
parameters such as gamma and color matrix are
also available in the menu for adjustment to the
preferred tones.
User button/ring assignable with
different functions for greater ease of
use
Menu items corresponding to each of the 9 buttons
and 2 rings are available to assign the buttons and
rings with different functions.
Built-in 3-position ND filter
ND filters are built into this camera recorder. You
can adjust the amount of light according to the
brightness during shooting by switching the 3-
position ND filter (OFF, 1/4, 1/16).
Detachable handle unit with 2-channel
XLR audio input terminal K
The handle unit is built in with recording and zoom
switches, and supports microphones for business
use. The recording level can also be adjusted, and
connection of a phantom microphone is also
supported.
* GY-HM170U/GY-HM170E does not come with
the handle unit.
For details on purchasing the handle unit, please
contact the local dealers in your area.
Content of this manual
Symbols used
Caution : Describes precautions concerning the
operation of this product.
Memo : Describes reference information, such as
functions and usage restrictions of this
product.
A
: Indicates the reference page numbers and
reference items.
K
: Feature available on
GY-HM200U/GY-HM200E only.
M
: Feature available on
GY-HM170U/GY-HM170E only.
O
: Function that operates only when the handle
unit is attached.
Content of this manual
0All rights reserved by JVC KENWOOD Corporation.
Unauthorized duplication or reprinting of this manual,
in whole or in part, is strictly prohibited.
0Illustrated designs, specifications and other contents
of this manual are subject to change for improvement
without prior notice.
0AVCHD Progressive and the AVCHD Progressive logo
are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony
Corporation.
0SDXC and SDHC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
0HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) and
1
are trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
0QuickTime, Final Cut Pro, iPhone, iPad, iPod touch,
iOS, Mac OS and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
0Android, Google Chrome and Nexus are trademarks
and/or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
0QR Code is a registered trademark of Denso Wave
Incorporated.
0Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
0Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista,
Windows 7 and Internet Explorer are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
0Surface is the trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
0Mozilla and Firefox are either trademarks or registered
trademarks of Mozilla Foundation in the United States
and/or other countries.
0Intel Core 2 Duo is a trademark or registered trademark
of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United
States and other countries.
0The company name of Fontworks, Fontworks, and the
name of the fonts are registered trademarks of
Fontworks Inc.
0Zixi and the Zixi logo are trademarks of Zixi LCC.
0Other product and company names included in this
instruction manual are trademarks and/or registered
trademarks of their respective companies. Marks such
as ™ and ® have been omitted in this manual.
Main Features 13
Introduction
Precautions for Proper
Use
Storage and Usage Locations
oAllowable ambient temperature and humidity
Be sure to use this unit within the allowable
temperature range of 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to
104°F) and a relative humidity of 30 % to 80 %.
Using this unit at a temperature or humidity
outside the allowable ranges could result not
only in malfunction but also serious impact on
the CMOS elements as small white spots may
be generated. Please exercise care during use.
oStrong electromagnetic waves or magnetism
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or
the colors may be incorrect if this unit is used
near a radio or television transmitting antenna,
in places where strong magnetic fields are
generated by transformers, motors, etc., or near
devices emitting radio waves, such as
transceivers or cellular phones.
Use of wireless microphone near this unit
When a wireless microphone or wireless
microphone tuner is used near this unit during
recording, the tuner could pick up noise.
oAvoid using or placing this unit in the following
places.
0Places subject to extreme heat or cold
0Places with excessive dirt or dust
0Places with high humidity or moisture
0Places subject to smoke or vapor such as near
a cooking stove
0Places subject to strong vibrations or unstable
surfaces
0In a parked car under direct sunlight or near a
heater for long hours
oDo not place this unit at places that are subject
to radiation or X-rays, or where corrosive gases
occur.
oProtect this unit from being splashed with water.
(Especially when shooting in the rain)
oProtect this unit from getting wet when shooting
on a beach. In addition, salt and sand may
adhere to the body. Be sure to clean the unit after
use.
oProtect this unit against penetration of dust
when using it in a place subject to sandy dust.
Transportation
oDo not drop or hit this unit against a hard object
when transporting.
Power Saving
oWhen this unit is not in use, be sure to set the
[POWER ON/OFF] switch to “OFF” in order to
reduce power consumption.
Maintenance
oTurn off the power before performing any
maintenance.
oWipe the external cabinet of the unit with a soft
cloth. Do not wipe the body with benzene or
thinner. Doing so may cause the surface to melt
or turn cloudy. When it is extremely dirty, soak
the cloth in a solution of neutral detergent, wipe
the body with it, and then use a clean cloth to
remove the detergent.
Rechargeable Battery
oBe sure to use only the specified batteries.
We do not guarantee the safety and
performance of this device if an unspecified
battery is used.
oM
0Charge the battery first before using.
0If you are not using the battery for a prolonged
period of time, remove and keep the battery at
a 30 % to 40 % charge level to prevent
deterioration.
0Recharge the battery to a level of 10 % to 20
% once every six months when storing the
battery.
Storing the battery at a fully discharged state
will result in over discharging and inability to
charge the battery.
0Store the removed battery with the battery cap
attached in a dry place between 15 °C and
25 °C (59 °F and 77 °F).
oK
0For details, refer to the instruction manual of
the battery.
oATTENTION:
The product you have purchased
is powered by a rechargeable
battery that is recyclable.
Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for
information on how to recycle this
battery.
14 Precautions for Proper Use
Introduction
Regular Inspection (Maintenance)
oUnder normal environment, dust will
accumulate on the camera recorder when it is
used over a long period. Dust may enter the
camera recorder especially if it is used outdoors.
This may affect the image and sound quality of
the camera recorder. Check and replace the fan
after every 9000 hours (suggested guideline).
You can check the usage time of the fan in
[System] B [System Information] B [Fan Hour].
(A P114 [ Fan Hour ] )
If the fan is used for more than 9000 hours
without replacement, “Fan Maintenance
Required” will be displayed every time you turn
on the power.
SDHC/SDXC Cards
oSDHC/SDXC card is referred to as SD card in
this manual.
oThis camera recorder saves the recorded
images and audio sound on the SD card (sold
separately) in the card slot.
oIf the SD card contains files recorded by devices
other than this camera recorder or files that are
saved from a PC, the recordable time may be
shorter or data may not be properly recorded. In
addition, the remaining space on the card may
not increase even when files are deleted using
a PC.
oFor details on the combinations of usable SD
card and format setting, refer to the following.
(A P40 [Format Setting and Usable SD Card
Combinations] )
* Using cards other than those from Panasonic,
TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording
failure or data loss.
Handling of SD Cards
oThe status indicator lights up in red when data
on the SD card is being accessed.
Do not remove the SD card during data access
(such as recording, playback, or formatting). Do
not turn off the power or remove the battery and
AC adapter during access either.
oDo not use or store the SD card in a place that
is subject to static electricity or electrical noise.
oDo not place the SD card near locations that are
exposed to strong magnetic fields or radio
waves.
oInserting the SD card incorrectly may result in
damage of this unit or the SD card.
oWe are not liable for any accidental loss of data
stored on the SD card. Please back up any
important data.
oMake use of the SD card within the prescribed
conditions of use.
Do not use it at the following locations.
Places that are subject to direct sunlight, high
humidity or corrosion, places near thermal
equipment, sandy or dusty places, or in a car
under the sun with the doors and windows
closed.
oDo not bend or drop the SD card, or subject it to
strong impact or vibration.
oDo not splash the SD card with water.
oDo not dismantle or modify the SD card.
oDo not touch the terminals with your hands or
with a metal object.
oDo not allow dust, dirt, water, or foreign objects
to adhere to the terminals.
oDo not remove the labels or stick other labels or
stickers on the SD cards.
oDo not use pencils or ballpoint pens to write on
the SD cards. Always use oil-based pens.
oIf you format (initialize) the SD card, all data
recorded on the card, including video data and
setup files, will be deleted.
oYou are recommended to use cards that are
formatted (initialized) on this camera recorder.
0The SD card may be damaged if the camera
recorder is not operated correctly. Formatting
(Initializing) the SD card may allow it to
operate correctly.
0SD cards that have been formatted
(initialized) on other cameras, computers or
peripheral equipment may not operate
correctly. In this case, format (initialize) the SD
card on this camera recorder.
oIf you want to wipe out all information by
completely erasing the data, we recommend
either using commercially available software
that is specially designed for that purpose, or by
physically destroying the SD card with a
hammer, etc. When formatting or erasing data
using the camera recorder, only the file
administration information is changed. The data
is not completely erased from the SD card.
oSome commercially available SD cards may be
harder to be removed from this unit. Remove
them by hooking onto the groove on the cards.
0It will be easier to remove the cards after
several times.
0Do not stick any stickers on the cards.
.
Groove
oThe SD card may pop out when it is being
removed. Be careful not to lose the card.
Precautions for Proper Use 15
Introduction
Others
oDo not insert objects other than the memory card
into the card slot.
oDo not block the vent on the unit.
Blocking of the vent causes internal heating and
may lead to burns and fires.
0Do not turn off the [POWER ON/OFF] switch
or remove the power cable during recording
or playback.
0The camera recorder may not show stable
pictures for a few seconds immediately after
the power is turned on, but this is not a
malfunction.
0When the video signal output terminals are not
in use, put on the covers to prevent damage
to the terminals.
oDo not drop this unit or subject it to strong impact
or vibration as it is a precision equipment.
oOptical performance of lens
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color
divergence phenomena (magnification
chromatic aberration) may occur at the
periphery of the image. This is not a camera
malfunction.
oNoise may appear in the image when switching
modes.
oIf placed on its side, heat release efficiency will
deteriorate.
oUse the supplied AC adapter as the power
supply. Do not use the supplied AC adapter on
other devices.
oWhen the connectors that come with connector
covers are not in use, put on the covers to
prevent damage to the connectors.
oThis camera recorder makes use of fonts by
Fontworks Inc.
oThis camera recorder makes use of M+FONTS.
LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
oThe LCD monitor and viewfinder screen are
manufactured using high-precision technology.
Black spots may appear on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen, or red, blue, and/or white
spots may not disappear. However, this is not a
malfunction and these spots are not recorded on
the SD card.
oIf you use this unit continuously for a long period
of time, the characters displayed in the
viewfinder may temporarily remain on the
screen. This is not recorded on the SD card.
They will not appear after you turn the power off
and then on again.
oIf you use this unit in a cold place, the images
may appear to lag on the screen, but this is not
a malfunction. Retained images are not
recorded on the SD card.
oDo not press against the surface with force or
subject it to strong impact. Doing so may
damage or break the screens.
oNoise may appear in the viewfinder when
switching between the live video and playback
images.
oDue to the characteristic of the viewfinder
display device, colors may appear on the
images when you blink your eyes. It does not
affect the recorded images, SDI output K, or
HDMI output.
16 Precautions for Proper Use
Introduction
Copyright
oAny recordings made on this camera recorder
that are played back for profit or public preview
may infringe on the rights of the owner of the
recordings.
Do not use the recordings for purpose other than
personal enjoyment without prior consent from
the owner.
License Notices
oMPEG LA AVC
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR
OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT
RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM
MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
oMPEG LA MPEG-2 Patent
ANY USE OF THIS UNIT IN ANY MANNER
OTHER THAN PERSONAL USE THAT
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-2 STANDARD
FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR
PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY
PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, LLC, 6312 S.
WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG
LA, LLC, 6312 S. Fiddlers Green circle, Suite
400E, Greenwood Village, Colorado 80111
U.S.A.
Encryption in Network Connection
oWireless LAN connections make use of an
encryption function.
This encryption is designed for commercially-
sold equipment, and it cannot be altered.
Precautions for Proper Use 17
Introduction
Operation Modes
This camera recorder has four operation modes - Camera mode, Media mode, USB mode and Remote
Edit mode.
.
MODE
Set Button
(R)
Set Button (R)
Trimming Playback
Normal Playback
[CANCEL/STOP]/[MENU/THUMB] Button
FTP in Progress
FTP in Progress
Exit FTP
Operation
(Successful)
Camera Input
*
* Selecting a mode other than the Metadata Edit mode via the web
browser, or selecting [Exit] on the [Remote Edit Mode] screen
Upon access via a web browser and selecting [Change] on the
[Change to Remote Edit Mode?] screen on the camera or the web browser
Connection to PC
with USB Cable
Press and hold [MODE]
[MODE]
Button
Press and hold [MODE]
[MODE] Button
Execute [FTP Upload]
Exit/Cancel FTP Operation (Successful/Failed/Stopped)
(Actions)
Execute [Delete Clips] File Deletion in Progress
Exit/Cancel File Delete Operation (Successful/Failed/Stopped)
Trimming in Progress
Exit Trimming Operation
(Successful/Failed/Stopped)
[ZEBRA/5]
Button
Execute
[Trim This Clip]
Media Mode
Thumbnail Display
USB Connection (When the confirmation to change
to USB mode appears and [Change] is selected)
(USB Mass Storage Class)
USB Mode
Connection disabled on PC
Camera Mode
Remote Edit Mode
Playback
GY-HM200U/
GY-HM200E only
18 Operation Modes
Introduction
Operation Mode Description
Camera Mode 0This is the camera shooting mode. The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode
when the power is turned on.
0Camera images are output on the viewfinder and LCD monitor. When a recordable
SD card is inserted, the camera recorder enters the recording standby mode.
“STBY” appears on the operation mode display area of the LCD monitor and
viewfinder.
0Press the [REC] trigger button to start recording.
Memo :
0Playback of SD card is not possible in Camera mode. However, you can check the
most recently recorded video clip.
(A P73 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip Review)] )
Media Mode 0This mode allows you to play back or delete clips recorded on the SD card.
0When a playable SD card is inserted, the thumbnail or playback screen is displayed
on the viewfinder and LCD monitor.
0Press and hold the [MODE] selection button to enter the Media mode when you
are not shooting in the Camera mode. Once the camera recorder is in Media mode,
thumbnails of the selected media slot are displayed.
USB Mode 0This mode allows you to connect to a PC and transfer the files on an SD card to
the PC.
0When the camera recorder is connected to a USB cable, the message “Change to
USB Mode?” appears.
Select [Change] and press the Set button to switch to USB mode.
(A P140 [Loading Clips to the PC] )
0In USB mode, the camera recorder is recognized by the connected PC as a
peripheral drive. (USB mass storage class only)
Disable the connection on the PC and remove the USB cable from the camera
recorder to switch to Camera mode.
(A P140 [Loading Clips to the PC] )
Memo :
0When a USB cable is connected during recording, the message appears after
recording stops.
0If playback is in progress, the message appears once the files are closed
automatically, such as when playback stops.
0Files on the PC cannot be written to the SD card.
Remote Edit
Mode K
0This mode enables the list display and editing of the recorded clip data through
access to the clip list display page via a web browser on a smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC.
0When you access via a web browser on a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, “It
is necessary to change the camera mode to "Remote Edit Mode". Change the
mode.” appears on the web browser. Also, “Change to Remote Edit Mode?” is
displayed on the display screen of the camera unit.
Selecting [Change] on the camera recorder and pressing the Set button switches
to the Remote Edit mode, and enables display of the clip list and editing of the clip
metadata.
(A P152 [ Clip Metadata ] )
(A P155 [Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser K] )
Memo :
0If you access via a web browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal,
or PC while recording is in progress, the message appears after recording stops.
0If playback is in progress, the message appears once the files are closed
automatically, such as when playback stops.
Operation Modes 19
Introduction
Names of Parts
.
A
F
B
D
E
C
ABuilt-in Microphone
(A P65 [Audio Recording] )
BHandle Unit K
(A P24 [Handle Unit K] )
* GY-HM170U/GY-HM170E does not come with
the handle unit.
For details on purchasing the handle unit, please
contact the local dealers in your area.
Memo :
0The handle unit is detached from the camera
recorder unit in the factory shipment.
For details on attaching the handle unit, please
refer to [Attaching the Handle Unit K] .
(A P27 [Attaching the Handle Unit K] )
C[MODE] Camera/Media Mode Selection Button
(A P18 [Operation Modes] )
D[POWER ON/OFF] Lock Power ON/OFF Switch
Turns ON/OFF the power.
0Hold down the lock button (blue) in the center
to toggle ON/OFF.
0When the power is turning OFF, “P.OFF”
appears on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
0Wait for 5 seconds or more to turn on the
power again.
(A P32 [Turning On/Off the Power] )
E[POWER/CHARGE] Power/Charging Display
Lamp
(A P29 [Using a Battery Pack] )
F[AWB/9] Auto White Balance/User 9 Button
0For executing Auto White Balance and
switching the registered color temperature.
(A P60 [Adjusting the White Balance] )
0You can also use it as a user button by
assigning a specific feature in the menu
setting to this button.
.
H
L
K
M
I
J
N
G
o Bottom
O
GVisibility Adjustment Lever
(A P37 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
HBattery
(A P29 [Using a Battery Pack] )
IViewfinder
(A P37 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
JEyepiece
Prevents external light from entering the
viewfinder screen and cameraman’s vision.
K[REC/7] Record Trigger Button
0Starts/stops recording.
(A P46 [Basic Shooting Procedures] )
0You can also use it as a user button by
assigning a specific feature in the menu
setting to this button.
LZoom Lever at the Grip
(A P49 [Using the Zoom Lever at the Grip] )
M[EXPANDED FOCUS/8] Expanded Focus
Assist/User 8 Button
0For switching the expanded focus ON or
OFF.
(A P52 [Expanded Focus Function] )
0You can also use it as a user button by
assigning a specific feature in the menu
setting to this button.
NTally Lamp
(A P39 [Tally Lamp] )
(A P174 [Blinking of the Tally Lamp] )
OTripod Mounting Hole
(A P29 [Attaching the Tripod] )
20 Names of Parts
Introduction
Side Control Panel
.
B
F
G
D
C
M J I HL K
E
A
A[FULL AUTO] Full Auto Selection Button
Press and hold the button to switch the Full Auto
mode ON and OFF.
Full Auto mode adjusts the Iris, Gain, Shutter
and White Balance automatically.
(A P54 [Adjusting the Brightness
Automatically: Automatic Brightness
Adjustment (AE) Mode] )
(A P55 [Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment)
Mode] )
(A P57 [Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic
Gain Adjustment)] )
(A P58 [Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic
Shutter Adjustment)] )
(A P60 [Automatic White Balance Mode
(FAW: Fulltime Auto White balance)] )
Memo :
0This camera recorder is set to Full Auto mode in
the factory default.
B[AF/MF] Focus Selection Button
(A P50 [Focus Operation] )
C[ND FILTER] ND Filter Switch
(A P59 [Setting the ND Filter] )
D[F.ASSIST/1] Focus Assist/User 1 Button
0For switching the focus assist function ON or
OFF.
(A P52 [Focus Assist Function] )
0You can also use it as a user button by
assigning a specific feature in the menu
setting to this button.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
E[TC/2] Time Code/User 2 Button
0Displays the time code setting screen.
(A P69 [Setting Time Code Generator] )
0You can also use it as a user button by
assigning a specific feature in the menu
setting to this button.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
FLCD monitor
(A P23 [LCD Monitor] )
GJ / K Volume Buttons/[+/-] Selection Buttons
0Switches the audio monitor and adjusts the
monitor speaker/headphone.
(A P67 [Monitoring Audio Sound During
Recording Using a Headphone] )
0For switching the shutter speed and setting
the automatic brightness adjustment (AE)
level.
(A P58 [Switching Shutter Speed] )
(A P54 [Adjusting the Brightness
Automatically: Automatic Brightness
Adjustment (AE) Mode] )
H[SHUTTER] Shutter Speed Button
For switching the shutter speed in the Manual
Shutter mode. Press and hold the button to
switch between Automatic Shutter mode and
Manual Shutter mode.
(A P58 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )
I[AE LEVEL] Automatic Brightness Adjustment
(AE) Level Setting Button
Sets the automatic brightness adjustment (AE)
level. Press and hold the button to switch
between “AE Level Setting Mode” and
“Recommended Fixed Level (AE: ±0)”.
(A P54 [Adjusting the Brightness] )
J[OIS/6] Optical Image Stabilizer/User 6 Button
0For switching the optical image stabilizer
feature ON or OFF.
(A P64 [Using the Image Stabilizer] )
0You can also use it as a user button by
assigning a specific feature in the menu
setting to this button.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
K[WHT BAL B/A/PRST] White Balance Switch
(A P60 [Adjusting the White Balance] )
L[GAIN L/M/H] Gain Switch
(A P57 [Setting the Gain] )
M[IRIS A/M] Auto Iris/Manual Iris Button
(A P55 [Adjusting the Iris] )
Names of Parts 21
Introduction
Side Terminal Section
.
A
D
C
B
A[HOST] USB Host Terminal K
For connecting an USB adapter according to
the intended purpose when you are connecting
the unit to a network.
(A P143 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
B[DEVICE] USB Mini Terminal
(A P140 [Loading Clips to the PC] )
C[HDMI] HDMI Output Terminal
(A P138 [Connecting External Monitor] )
D[SDI OUT] SDI Output Terminal K
(A P109 [ SDI Rec Trigger K ] )
(A P138 [Connecting External Monitor] )
Rear Terminal
GY-HM200U/GY-HM200E
.
C
B
D
A
GFEH
GY-HM170U/GY-HM170E
.
C
B
D
A
GFEH
A[BATTERY] Terminal
B[BATT. RELEASE] Battery Lock Release Button
(A P30 [Removing the Battery] )
C[REC] Record Trigger Button
0Starts/stops recording.
(A P46 [Basic Shooting Procedures] )
0You can change its function in the menu.
Memo :
0This button is interlocked with the [REC/HOLD]
record trigger button I at the top of the handle.
D[DC] DC Input Terminal
Input terminal for DC 12 V power supply. For
connecting with the supplied AC adapter.
(A P31 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)] )
E[REMOTE] Remote Terminal
(A P140 [Connecting Wired Remote Control] )
F[AUX] AUX Input Terminal (Φ3.5 mm)
For connecting to receiver such as wireless
microphone.
(A P65 [Audio Recording] )
G[x] Headphone Jack (Φ3.5 mm)
(A P67 [Monitoring Audio Sound During
Recording Using a Headphone] )
H[AV] AV Output Terminal
(A P138 [Connecting External Monitor] )
22 Names of Parts
Introduction
LCD Monitor
.
G
F
E
H
I
J
D
B
A
C
L KM
ALCD Monitor
(A P37 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
B[CANCEL/STOP] Cancel Button
Cancels various settings and stops playback.
CLCD Cross-Shaped Button (JKHI)/Set Button
(R)
0The function changes according to the
operation status of the camera recorder.
0During menu operation (all modes)
(A P92 [Basic Operations in Menu
Screen] )
0During Camera mode
0You can use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
D[MENU/THUMB] Menu/Thumbnail Button
0Displays the menu screen during Camera
mode.
0Switches between [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] when the [MENU/THUMB]
button is pressed and held down while the
menu screen is displayed.
(A P92 [Basic Operations in Menu
Screen] )
0Displays the menu screen when the button is
pressed during thumbnail display in the
Media mode.
0Stops playback and displays the thumbnail
screen when the button is pressed during
playback screen display in the Media mode.
E[LOLUX/3] Low-light Shooting/User 3 Button
0For switching the low-light shooting mode
ON or OFF.
0You can also use it as a user button by
assigning a specific feature in the menu
setting to this button.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
F[C.REVIEW/4] Clip Review/User 4 Button
0For checking the most recently captured
images.
(A P73 [Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)] )
0You can also use it as a user button by
assigning a specific feature in the menu
setting to this button.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
G[ZEBRA/5] Zebra/User 5 Button
(A P72 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
H[DISPLAY] Display Button
0Press the [DISPLAY] button to switch to the
display screen during normal screen display
(when the menu screen is not displayed).
(A P35 [Display Screen] )
0Switches between [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] when the [DISPLAY] button
is pressed while the menu screen is
displayed.
(A P92 [Basic Operations in Menu
Screen] )
I[STATUS] Status Screen Display Button
Press the [STATUS] button to display the status
screen on the viewfinder and LCD monitor
during normal screen display (when the menu
screen is not displayed).
(A P36 [Status Screen] )
JMonitor Speaker
(A P86 [Audio Output during Playback] )
KSD Card Slot
(A P41 [Inserting an SD Card] )
LCard Slot A/B Status Indicator
M[SLOT SEL] Card Slot Selection Button
For switching the active card slot during
shooting and playback.
Names of Parts 23
Introduction
Handle Unit K
.
D
C
F
A
B
E
K
H
I
G
R
S
P
Q
J
N OML
AMicrophone Holder
(A P27 [Attaching the External Microphone
O] )
BMicrophone Holder Lock Knob
(A P27 [Attaching the External Microphone
O] )
CHandle Tally Lamp
(A P39 [Tally Lamp] )
(A P174 [Blinking of the Tally Lamp] )
DAccessory Mounting Screw Hole
EShoe
For mounting separately sold lights and
accessories.
FHandle Unit Fastening Screw
(A P27 [Attaching the Handle Unit K] )
GZoom Lever on Handle
(A P49 [Using the Zoom Lever at the Handle
O] )
H[ZOOM L/M/H] Zoom Speed Switch
(A P49 [Zoom Operation] )
For switching the zoom speed of the zoom lever
8 at the handle.
I[REC/HOLD] Record Trigger Button/Lock
Switch
Starts/stops recording.
Set the switch to [HOLD] to lock the [REC]
Trigger button.
Memo :
0This switch is interlocked with the [REC] button
C on the rear terminal.
0[REC] button C on the rear terminal is not
locked.
J[INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Terminal 1, 2
(XLR 3-pin x 2)
(A P27 [Attaching the External Microphone
O] )
KHandle Terminal
L[CH1] CH1 Audio Input Signal Selection Switch
Select the audio input terminal to record to CH1.
(A P65 [Audio Recording] )
M[CH2] CH2 Audio Input Signal Selection Switch
Select the audio input terminal to record to CH2.
(A P65 [Audio Recording] )
N[INPUT1] Audio Input Signal Selection Switch
(A P65 [Audio Recording] )
O[INPUT2] Audio Input Signal Selection Switch
(A P65 [Audio Recording] )
P[CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] CH2 Audio Recording
Mode Switch
(A P66 [Adjusting the Audio Recording Level
O] )
Q[CH2] CH2 Recording Level Adjustment Knob
(A P65 [Audio Recording] )
R[CH1] CH1 Recording Level Adjustment Knob
(A P65 [Audio Recording] )
S[CH1 AUTO/MANUAL] CH1 Audio Recording
Mode Switch
(A P66 [Adjusting the Audio Recording Level
O] )
24 Names of Parts
Introduction
Lens Section
.
A
C DB
AFilter Built-In Screw
0Transparent or UV filter for lens protection, or
filters for various effects can be installed.
0Installable filter types: Φ62 mm P0.75
Memo :
0Remove the lens hood when installing the filter.
(A P28 [Attaching/Detaching the Hood] )
BFocus Ring
(A P50 [Focus Operation] )
CZoom Ring
(A P49 [Zoom Operation] )
You can set different functions for the zoom ring
and iris dial in [Main Menu] B [Camera
Function] B [Zoom Ring].
(A P97 [ Zoom Ring ] )
DIris Dial
(A P55 [Adjusting the Iris] )
You can assign the dial for “Shutter” or “AE
Level” adjustment in [Main Menu] B [Camera
Function] B [Iris Dial].
(A P97 [ Iris Dial ] )
Names of Parts 25
Introduction
Basic System Diagram
.
Wireless Microphone
Receiver
RCA pin
AV Cabl e
HDMI Cable
[AUX]
[INPUT1/INPUT2]
[SDI OUT]
[HDMI]
[AV]
[REMOTE]
[DEVICE]
[DC]
[x]
K :
Carrying Case
Tr i p o d
SDHC/SDXC
Memory Card
SDHC/SDXC
Card Reader
USB Cable
Battery
Standard Package
AC Adapter
Handle Unit
Remote Control Unit
Non-linear Editing
System
GY-HM200U/GY-HM200E/
GY-HM170U/GY-HM170E
GY-HM200U/GY-HM200E
only
GY-HM200U/GY-HM200E only
Microphone
Monitor
SDI Cable
BNC
Headphone
[HOST]
Network Adapter
GY-HM200U/GY-HM200E only
When handle unit is attached
Battery Chager
IDX Battery Charger
M :
M :
BN-VF823
K :
SSL-JVC50 AA-VF8
* GY-HM170U/GY-HM170E does not come with the handle unit.
For details on purchasing the handle unit, please contact the local dealers in your area.
26 Basic System Diagram
Introduction
Settings and Adjustments
Before Use
.
Attaching the Handle Unit K
The handle unit is detached from the camera
recorder unit in the factory shipment.
*GY-HM170U/GY-HM170E does not come with
the handle unit.
For details on purchasing the handle unit, please
contact the local dealers in your area.
To use the handle unit, attach it by following the
steps below.
* Attach or detach the handle unit when the power
is turned off.
.
1Fit the handle terminal at the bottom of the
handle unit to the handle unit mount at the
top of the camera recorder.
0Fit the handle unit carefully, paying attention
not to damage the terminals at the bottom of
the unit.
2Slide the handle unit in the direction
indicated by the arrow to attach it to the hot
shoe of the camera recorder.
3Press the screw on the handle unit and turn
it in the clockwise direction. Tighten it
securely to fasten the unit to the camera
recorder.
0The handle unit may be unsteady if the screw
is not securely fastened, and may fall off
during use.
Caution :
0Attach or detach the handle unit when the power
is turned off.
Doing so when the power is turned on can result
in malfunction.
Adjusting the Grip Belt
Open the pad and adjust the position of the grip belt
accordingly.
.
Caution :
0If the grip is loose, the camera recorder may fall
off resulting in injuries or malfunction.
Attaching the External Microphone O
You can attach a separately sold microphone to the
microphone holder.
.
4
5
1, 3
2
1Turn the knob on the microphone holder
counterclockwise to loosen and open the
microphone holder.
2Place the microphone in the microphone
holder.
3Turn the knob on the microphone holder
clockwise to secure the microphone.
4Connect the microphone cable to the
[INPUT1] or [INPUT2] terminal.
5Pin the microphone cable to the clamp.
6Perform the settings for the microphone
correctly.
(A P65 [Audio Recording] )
Settings and Adjustments Before Use 27
Preparations
Attaching/Detaching the Lens Cap
0Before shooting, detach the lens cap.
0When this camera recorder is not in use, attach
the lens cap to protect the lens.
0Pinch the tabs on both sides of the lens cap to
attach and detach the lens cap.
.
Caution :
0Do not press against the lens cap with force.
Doing so may damage the lens or the cap.
Attaching/Detaching the Hood
Attaching the Hood
Align the markings on the camera recorder and
hood; turn the hood in the direction of the arrow
(clockwise) until it is locked.
.
Detaching the Hood
0To detach the hood, turn the hood in the
direction opposite to attaching it
(counterclockwise).
.
Caution :
0Remove the hood when attaching a filter,
teleconverter or wide converter to the front of the
lens.
28 Settings and Adjustments Before Use
Preparations
Attaching the Tripod
Use the screw hole at the bottom of this camera
recorder.
(3/8×16UNC, 1/4×20UNC)
Use the screw hole that suits the tripod.
To prevent the camera recorder from falling off,
which may result in injuries or damages, read the
instruction manual of the tripod to be used and
make sure that it is securely attached.
.
o Bottom
Caution :
0Use the tripod on a stable surface.
0To prevent the camera recorder from falling,
attach securely using the rotation prevention
hole.
0Use screws with screw length 5 mm and below.
Power Supply
To use this camera recorder, you can attach a
battery pack or connect an AC adapter to it.
(A P29 [Using a Battery Pack] )
(A P31 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)] )
Caution :
0Set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “OFF”
before changing the power supply that operates
this camera recorder.
Using a Battery Pack
Charging the Battery
Charge the battery immediately after purchase or
when the battery power is running low.
*The battery is not charged when purchased.
.
3
2
1
4
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set
to “OFF”.
2Attach the supplied battery.
Slide it in until you hear a click.
3Connect the supplied AC adapter to the
[DC] terminal.
Open the cover of the [DC] terminal and connect
as shown in the diagram.
4Connect the AC adapter to a power outlet.
0The [POWER/CHARGE] lamp blinks during
charging and will go out after charging is
complete.
0Remove the AC adapter after charging is
complete.
Memo :
0Blinking of the [POWER/CHARGE] lamp during
charging indicates the charge level.
[POWER/CHARGE] Lamp Charge Level
Alternates between a blinking
orange light (4 times) and
light off (1 second)
Less than 25 %
Alternates between a blinking
orange light (3 times) and
light off (1 second)
Less than 50 %
Alternates between a blinking
orange light (2 times) and
light off (1 second)
Less than 75 %
Alternates between a blinking
orange light (blinks once) and
light off (1 second)
Less than 100 %
Light goes out Fully charged
0You can charge the battery even when operating
the camera recorder using the AC adapter.
Settings and Adjustments Before Use 29
Preparations
Removing the Battery
.
2
GY-HM200U/GY-HM200E
GY-HM170U/GY-HM170E
1
2
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set
to “OFF”.
2While pressing and holding the [BATT.
RELEASE] button, push up and remove the
battery in the direction of the arrow.
Caution :
0Do not remove the battery when the [POWER
ON/OFF] switch is “ON”.
0Do not insert or remove the DC cable when the
battery is in use.
0Leaving the camera recorder unused with the
battery inside will deplete the battery power
even if you set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to
“OFF”. Remove the battery if you are not using
the camera recorder.
Estimated Charging and Continuous
Operating Times
oCharging time
SSL-JVC50 (accessory) K:Approx. 4 hrs
BN-VF823 (accessory) M:Approx. 3 hrs
*
When the [POWER ON/OFF] switch is set to “OFF”
Memo :
oM
0If you charge the battery immediately after using
while the battery is still warm, it may not be fully
charged.
0It is recommended that you charge the battery
in an environment between 10 °C and 30 °C (50
°F and 86 °F). The battery may not be fully
charged or the charging time may be prolonged
if charged under low temperatures (below 10 °C/
50 °F). In addition, charging the battery under
high temperature (above 30 °C/86 °F) condition
may shorten the battery life.
oK
0For details, refer to the instruction manual of the
battery.
oContinuous operating time
SSL-JVC50 (accessory)
K:Approx. 4 hrs 40 mins
(*1)
Approx. 5 hrs (*2)
BN-VF823 (accessory)
M:Approx. 2 hrs (*1)
Approx. 2 hrs 20 mins
(*2)
*1 When [System] is set to “4K” and all other
settings are in factory default
*2 When [System] is set to “HD” and all other
settings are in factory default
Memo :
0Actual operating times may differ depending on
the age of the battery, charging condition, and
operating environment.
0Operating time is shortened in cold
environment.
0The operating time may shorten when power
zoom is used, accessories are connected, or
when the LCD monitor is frequently used.
0For purchase of spare batteries and battery
charger, please contact the local dealers in your
area.
Precautions for Batteries
0Store the battery in a cool and dry place when
not in use. Do not expose the battery to high
temperatures (such as in a car under direct
sunlight). Failure to do so not only shortens the
battery life but also damages the battery.
0If the operating time shortens drastically even
after charging, the battery may be reaching the
end of its life. Replace the battery with a new
one.
30 Power Supply
Preparations
Using AC Power (DC IN Power)
Use the supplied AC adapter to operate the camera
recorder with AC power.
.
1
2
1Connect the DC cable of the AC adapter to
the [DC] terminal of the camera recorder.
0Check that the power switch of the camera
recorder is set to “OFF”.
0Open the cover of the [DC] terminal and
connect as shown in the diagram.
2
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set
to “ON”.
Power will be supplied to the camera recorder.
Caution :
0Do not insert or remove the DC cable during
recording.
0Do not use power supply of high voltage
fluctuation, containing noise such as ripple, or
with insufficient capacity.
Charging the Built-In Battery
0The date/time and time code data are stored
using the built-in rechargeable battery.
0When power is connected to the camera
recorder, the built-in battery always gets
charged. When the power is disconnected, the
battery gradually discharges.
0The battery will be totally discharged if left
unused for 3 months and the date/time and time
code data will be reset. When this happens, set
the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “ON” to display
the [Initial Setting] screen, then set the date/
time.
(A P33 [Initial Settings] )
Power Status Display
Viewfinder Screen and LCD Monitor
The power status is displayed on the display and
menu screens.
Display Description
B 7.4V
B 100min
C 30%
4 RES
Currently powered by a battery.
When the battery power runs out,
the battery mark appears hollow,
and “RES” (yellow) is displayed.
Memo :
0You can set the display using
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings]
B [Battery].
(A P107 [ Battery ] )
FAcquisition of battery information
may fail if a genuine battery is not
used.
TAppears when an error occurs
during battery charging.
GCurrently powered by an AC
adapter.
P
Q
R
S
Camera recorder battery charging
in progress.
(A P108 [Details on charging
condition] )
Memo :
0If the supplied battery (or equivalent battery sold
separately) is not used, the battery mark which
indicates the battery level may not appear.
Display Screen
(A P127 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )
(A P132 [Display Screen in Media Mode] )
.
1/100
F1 . 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00: 00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P  15000K
100min
50min
282min
3840x2160
30p 150M
Power Supply 31
Preparations
Menu Screen
(A P93 [Display and Description of the Menu
Screen] )
.
Display Settings
Warnings by Lamp and Warning Tone
Warning status is indicated by tally lamp and
warning tone.
0The tally lamp blinks.
0Setting [Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio Set]
B [Alarm Level] to “High” or “Low” sounds the
warning tone.
The warning tone is output from the monitor
speaker or [x] terminal.
(A P112 [ Alarm Level ] )
Memo :
0In the event that the battery level runs low while
it is being used, the camera recorder will stop
operating automatically.
Caution :
0The remaining battery power and time are
displayed as they are from the battery
information. Accurate data may not be displayed
depending on the battery condition. Replace the
battery as soon as possible when the remaining
battery power and time are low.
Turning On/Off the Power
Turning On the Power
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set
to “ON”.
The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode
and is ready for shooting.
Memo :
0
The camera recorder always start up in Camera
mode when the [POWER ON/OFF] switch is set to
“ON”. Use the [MODE] button at the side of the
camera recorder to switch mode.
(A P18 [Operation Modes] )
0
If the battery is not fully charged, the battery will be
charged at the same time.
0
Even when a fully charged battery is used, charge
the battery briefly to confirm the remaining battery
power.
(A P29 [Power Supply] )
(A P31 [Power Status Display] )
.
Turning Off the Power
Sets the camera recorder to the recording standby or
stop mode.
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set
to “OFF”.
2Remove the battery and the power to the [DC]
terminal (when not in use for a long time).
Caution :
0
Do not set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “OFF”
during recording. Check that the operation mode
display is “STBY” or “STOP” before you turn off the
power.
0
If you have mistakenly set the [POWER ON/OFF]
switch to “OFF” during recording, wait for 5
seconds or more before you turn on the power
again.
0
When turning off the power, first set the [POWER
ON/OFF] switch of the camera recorder to “OFF”.
Do not remove the battery or turn off the AC power
while the [POWER ON/OFF] switch is set to “ON”.
32 Power Status Display
Preparations
Initial Settings
When the power is first turned on, the Initial Setting
screen for performing the initial settings in the
camera recorder appears.
Set the date/time of the built-in clock in the [Initial
Setting] screen.
All operations are disabled until initial settings are
complete.
.
Memo :
0It is recommended to use the AC adapter as the
power supply.
0Attach the lens cap.
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set
to “ON”.
A language selection screen appears.
0For U models
.
Español
Français
English
Language
0For E models
.
Pусский
Español
Italiano
Deutsch
Français
English
Language
Memo :
0The menus and messages on the screen of the
LCD monitor or viewfinder are displayed in the
selected language.
2Select a language using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
The Initial Setting screen appears.
.
3Ensure the lens cap is attached, and press
the Set button (R).
0Self-diagnosis starts.
0A progress bar appears, and “Complete
Diagnosis” appears when the diagnosis is
complete.
.
Memo :
0It takes about 6 minutes to complete the
diagnosis. During the diagnosis, do not operate
or turn off the camera recorder.
Initial Settings 33
Preparations
4Press the Set button (R) after confirming
the exit screen.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears.
0For U models
.
Set
UTC-05:00
Initial Setting
0For E models
.
Set
UTC
Initial Setting
Memo :
0The [Initial Setting] screen appears when the
power is turned on for the first time and when the
power is turned on after the built-in battery is fully
discharged.
0The configured date/time data is saved in the
built-in rechargeable battery even if the power is
turned off.
5Set the time zone and date/time.
AMove the cursor with the cross-shaped button
(HI) and select the setting item.
BChange the values with the cross-shaped
button (JK).
6Press the Set button (R) after setting is
complete.
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/
time.
Memo :
0The configured date/time data can be displayed
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder and be
recorded to the SD card.
0The value of the year can be set in the range of
“2000” to “2099”.
Changing the Time after Initial Setting
Setting the Date/Time
(A P114 [ Date/Time ] )
1Select [System] B [Date/Time].
The [Date/Time] screen appears.
2Set the date and time.
AMove the cursor with the cross-shaped button
(HI) and select the setting item.
BChange the values with the cross-shaped
button (JK).
3Press the Set button (R) after setting is
complete.
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/
time.
Changing the Display Style
You can change the display style of the date/time
on the menu.
Setting the Date Display (Date Style)
(A P108 [ Date Style ] )
The date display can be changed in [LCD/VF] B
[Display Settings] B [Date Style].
Setting the Time Display (Time Style)
(A P108 [ Time Style ] )
The time display can be changed in [LCD/VF] B
[Display Settings] B [Time Style].
Date/Time Display in Each Operation
Mode
During Camera mode:
Date/time of the built-in clock is displayed.
During Media mode:
Shooting date/time of the clip being played back is
displayed.
34 Initial Settings
Preparations
Displays on the LCD
Monitor and Viewfinder
You can display the camera status, media
information, zebra pattern, and various markers in
the video image on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screen during shooting.
Memo :
0When [Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B
[Display On TV] is set to “On”, the display screen
and menu screen are also displayed in the video
image from the video signal output terminal.
(A P109 [ Display On TV ] )
Display Screen
Display Screen (VF/LCD) in Camera Mode
(A P127 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )
0The display switches between three screen
types with every press of the [DISPLAY] button.
(Display 0 B 1 B 2 B 0)
0Press the [STATUS] button to switch to the
status screen.
.
100min
50min
282min
1/100
F1.6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1/16
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 ,2015
00: 00:00.00
3840x2160
30p 150M
4030 20 10 0
5.6ft
P 15000K 1/100
F1.6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1/16
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 ,2015
00: 00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5.6ft
P 15000K
Display 2 screen
Display 1 screen
Display 0 screen
Display Screen (VF/LCD) in Media Mode
(A P132 [Display Screen in Media Mode] )
0This is the screen display during clip playback in
Media Mode.
0The display switches between three screen
types with every press of the [DISPLAY] button.
(Display 0 B 1 B 2 B 0)
.
1000/ 2000
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00: 00:00.00
3840x2160
30 p 150M
4030 20 10 0
1000/ 2000
282min
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00: 00:00.00
3840x2160
30p 150M
4030 20 10 0
1000/ 2000
x5
SELECT
x5
INFO
Display 2 screen
Display 1 screen
Display 0 screen
Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder 35
Preparations
Status Screen
0This screen allows you to check the current
settings.
0To display the status screen, press the
[STATUS] button in the normal screen.
0The status display differs according to the
operation mode (two types).
(A P18 [Operation Modes] )
0Press the [STATUS] button to switch to the
display screen.
0Press the [MENU] button at each status screen
(other than the [Camera 1] screen) to enter the
setting screen.
0Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to switch
screens as follows:
.
-62dB
Audio
Planning Metadata
Creator
Description
Title2
Title1
Aspect Marker
Zebra
Camera 1
Safety Zone
None
Handle Zoom Speed H
Handle Zoom Speed M
Handle Zoom Speed L
GAIN H
GAIN M
GAIN L
FAW
Camera 2
USER7
USER6
USER5
USER4
USER3
USER2
USER1
Rec
OIS
Zebra
Clip Review
Lolux
TC Preset
Focus Assist
USER Switch Set
HDMI Enhance
HDMI Color
Resolution
HDMI/SDI Out
Video
WPA2
P2P
MAC Address
IP Address
Passphrase
Security Type
SSID
Ty p e
Network
Format
Format
7.5%
SDI Rec Trigger
SD Aspect
SD Set Up
Squeeze
HDMI+SDI
1080i
Auto
Off
Off
Off
*
These are screen examples of GY-HM200U/GY-
HM200E. The contents displayed are different
depending on the model and settings.
USB Mode Screen
This screen displays the USB mode.
.
USB Mode
Remote Edit Mode Screen K
This is a mode for accessing the page for editing
the metadata that is recorded in a clip via a web
browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC.
(A P152 [ Clip Metadata ] )
.
Exit
Remote Edit Mode
Warning Display
Warning display is displayed in the display screen
(Camera mode, Media mode).
(A P170 [Error Messages and Actions] )
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P  15000K
Warning Display Area
36 Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
Preparations
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
and Viewfinder
You can monitor video images on this camera
recorder using the viewfinder, LCD monitor, or
both.
.
Normal LCD
Inverted
LCD
Displays on the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder Screen (VF)
[VF
SW]
Item
State of
Viewfinder
LCD
Screen
Viewfinder
Screen
LCD
Monitor
Open
LCD
Monitor
Open
LCD
Monitor
Closed
Enable Pulled out ON ON ON
Enable Retracted ON OFF ON
Disable - ON ON ON
ON: Display on, OFF: Display off
0“LCD Monitor Open” includes the state when the
LCD display is inverted.
0“LCD Monitor Closed” indicates the state when
there is no display on the LCD monitor.
Memo :
0
Press and hold the [DISPLAY] button for 2 seconds
to turn ON/OFF the LCD monitor.
0
The function to switch between LCD monitor and
viewfinder displays by pressing the [DISPLAY]
button can be canceled by opening/closing or
rotating the LCD monitor.
0
When [LCD/VF]
B
[VF SW] is set to “Enable”, it is
necessary to pull out the viewfinder in order to
display the images on the viewfinder.
(A P104 [ VF SW ] )
* When [LCD/VF]
B
[VF SW] is set to “Enable”,
images will be displayed on the viewfinder if the
viewfinder is pulled out, regardless of the state of
the LCD monitor.
(A P104 [ VF SW ] )
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
.
1
2
Tilt 90 degrees downward
Tilt 180 degrees
upward
1Open the LCD cover.
2Incline the LCD monitor to a position that
enables easy viewing.
Rotate the LCD monitor to adjust the angle.
0While the LCD monitor is open, you can
rotate it 180 degrees upward or 90 degrees
downward.
0Rotating the LCD monitor 180 degrees
upward enables you to see the screen from
the lens side. To display the image when it is
viewed from the opposite direction (mirror
image), perform setting as follows.
Set [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [LCD
Mirror] to “Mirror” B Set button (R)
(A P105 [ LCD Mirror ] )
3Adjust the brightness, contour, and
contrast of the LCD monitor.
You can change the angle and brightness of the
LCD monitor according to your usage condition.
Changing the brightness of the screen will not
affect the recorded images.
0Use the [LCD Bright] menu to adjust the
brightness of the LCD monitor.
[Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [LCD Bright]
(A P105 [ LCD Bright ] )
0Use the [LCD/VF Peaking] menu to adjust the
contour of the LCD monitor.
(The contour of the viewfinder screen will
also be adjusted at the same time.)
[Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [LCD/VF
Peaking]
(A P105 [ LCD/VF Peaking ] )
0Use the [LCD Contrast] menu to adjust the
contrast of the LCD monitor.
[Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [LCD Contrast]
(A P105 [ LCD Contrast ] )
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder 37
Preparations
Adjusting the Viewfinder
You can change the brightness and peaking of the
viewfinder screen according to your usage
conditions.
Changing the brightness of the screen will not
affect the recorded images.
.
2
1
3
Caution :
0A high-definition viewfinder is used on this
camera recorder in order to provide an accurate
focusing environment. Due to the characteristic
of the display device, colors may appear on the
images when you blink your eyes. This is not a
malfunction. It does not affect the recorded
images, SDI output K, AV output, or HDMI
output.
1Pull out the viewfinder.
2Incline the viewfinder vertically to a
position that enables easy viewing.
3Adjust the visibility using the visibility
adjustment lever.
Adjust the visibility adjustment lever to sharpen
the image on the viewfinder screen.
4Adjust the brightness, contour, and
contrast of the viewfinder screen.
0Use the [VF Bright] menu to adjust the
brightness of the viewfinder screen.
[Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [VF Bright]
(A P105 [ VF Bright ] )
0Use the [LCD/VF Peaking] menu to adjust the
contour of the viewfinder.
(The contour of the LCD monitor will also be
adjusted at the same time.)
[Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [LCD/VF
Peaking]
(A P105 [ LCD/VF Peaking ] )
0Use the [VF Contrast] menu to adjust the
contrast of the viewfinder screen.
[Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [VF Contrast]
(A P105 [ VF Contrast ] )
Memo :
0If [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [VF SW] is set to
“Enable”, pull out the viewfinder before making
any adjustment.
(A P104 [ VF SW ] )
Displaying in Black and White
You can display the viewfinder screen in black
and white.
0[Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [VF Color] item
B Press Set button (R) B Select “Off” B
Press Set button (R).
(A P104 [ VF Color ] )
38 Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
Preparations
Assignment of Functions
to User Buttons
You can assign functions to the following buttons
and use them as user buttons.
By assigning functions to the buttons, the usability
of the camera recorder can be enhanced.
Perform settings in the menu items corresponding
to each button.
Button Menu Item
[F.ASSIST/1] Button [USER1]
[TC/2] Button [USER2]
[LOLUX/3] Button [USER3]
[C.REVIEW/4] Button [USER4]
[ZEBRA/5] Button [USER5]
[OIS/6] Button [USER6]
[REC/7] Button [USER7]
[EXPANDED FOCUS/8] Button [USER8]
[AWB/9] Button [USER9]
LCD Cross-Shaped Button (J) [LCD KEY▲]
LCD Cross-Shaped Button (K) [LCD KEY▼]
LCD Cross-Shaped Button (H) [LCD KEY◀]
LCD Cross-Shaped Button (I) [LCD KEY▶]
.
1Assign functions to the buttons from the
menu.
Specify each item in [Main Menu] B [Camera
Function] B [User Switch Set] B [USER1]-
[USER9], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶], [LCD
KEY▼], [LCD KEY◀].
(A P98 [User Switch Set Item] )
Memo :
0Operations of the user buttons are interlocked
with the menu settings.
0When the menu screen is displayed, these
buttons function as the menu operation buttons.
(A P92 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Tally Lamp
This is the indicator lamp for recording and
warning.
The operation changes according to the menu
settings.
The lamp blinks when the battery or remaining
space on the SD card is low. (Camera mode only)
*Specify the setting in [Main Menu] B [System]
B [Tally Lamp].
(A P113 [ Tally Lamp ] )
.
Tally Lamp
(Front)
Handle Tally
Lamp
Menu setting [Tally Lamp] Off On
Functional
information
Warning - J
Caution - o
Recording status Recording - R
Special recording * - R
R:Lights up
J:Blinks four times in 1 second
o:Blinks once in 1 second
*Paused state during special recording ([Clip
Continuous]).
(A P79 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
Memo :
0Blinking takes priority over lighting up.
Assignment of Functions to User Buttons 39
Preparations
SD Card
This camera recorder saves the recorded images
and audio sound on the SD card (sold separately)
in the card slot.
Usable Cards
Format Setting and Usable SD Card
Combinations
System Format Bit Rate Usable SD
Card
4K - - UHS-I U3 or
higher
HD QuickTime 50M
(YUV422),
50M (XHQ)
Class 10 or
higher
35M (UHQ) Class 6 or
higher
AVCHD - Class 4 or
higher
SD - -
Web - -
Caution :
0Using cards other than those from Panasonic,
TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording
failure or data loss.
0If an UHS-I card with no classification indication
is used, it may not be possible to perform HD
recording.
Estimated Recordable Time of SD Cards
The estimated recordable time is only a guide.
Differences may occur depending on the SD card
in use and the battery condition.
(A P115 [ W Resolution ] )
(A P116 [ Y Resolution ] )
(A P115 [ W Frame Rate ] )
(A P116 [ Y Frame Rate ] )
(A P115 [ W Bit Rate ] )
(A P116 [ Y Bit Rate ] )
oWhen [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record Format] B [Format] is set to
“AVCHD”
Resolution
1080p
1080i 480i/
576i
Bit Rate HQ HQ SP LP EP -
4GB 16 19 25 46 82 50
8GB 33 39 50 95 168 103
16GB 67 78 100 190 336 209
32GB 135 156 200 380 672 420
64GB
(SDXC)
270 312 400 760 1344 842
128GB
(SDXC)
540 624 800 1520 2688 1687
(Unit: minute)
oWhen [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record Format] B [Format] is set to
“QuickTime”
System 4K HD SD Web
Resolution 2160p 1080i/1080p 480i/
576i
960p 480p
Bit Rate - XHQ UHQ - HQ LP
4GB 3 9 12 47 130 285
8GB 6 18 25 95 270 580
16GB 12 36 50 190 540 1160
32GB 25 72 100 380 1080 2320
64GB
(SDXC)
50 145 200 760 2160 4720
128GB
(SDXC)
100 290 400 1520 4320 9440
(Unit: minute)
Memo :
0If the SD card contains files recorded by devices
other than this camera recorder or files that are
saved from a PC, the recordable time may be
shorter or data may not be properly recorded.
0For each file format, up to 600 clips can be
recorded to one SD card on this camera
recorder. When 600 clips are recorded to one
card, the remaining space is displayed as 0 min
regardless of the estimated recordable time,
and no further recording can be performed.
0When the file format is set to “AVCHD”, up to
4000 clips can be recorded to one SD card.
Write-Protect Switch on the SD Card
ASlide the write-protect switch upward to enable
writing or deleting.
BSlide the write-protect switch downward to
prevent writing or deleting. (Images in the card
are protected.)
.
AB
Write/Delete Enabled Write/Delete Disabled
Write-Protect Switch
40 SD Card
Preparations
Inserting an SD Card
This camera recorder comes with two card slots
(Slot A and B) for video/audio recording and
playback.
.
1
3
SD Card Cover
2
SD Card
1Open the SD card cover by sliding the cover
in the direction indicated by the arrow.
2Insert an SD card with the notched corner
pointing up.
The status indicator of the card slot to which the
card was inserted lights up in red.
3Close the SD card cover in the direction
indicated by the arrow.
Card Slot Status Indicator
The following table shows the respective states of
slot A and B.
Lamp Slot Status
Lights up in
red
The inserted SD card is being
accessed. (writing/reading data)
Do not turn off the power of the
camera recorder or remove the SD
card.
Lights up in
green
On standby. The inserted SD card
can be used for recording or
playback.
Light goes out 0SD card is not inserted.
0An unusable card is inserted.
0An SD card is inserted but a
different slot is selected.
Removing the SD Card
1Check that the SD card to be removed is not
being accessed (status indicator of the
card slot lights up in red).
2Slide open the SD card cover.
3Push the SD card and remove it from the
slot.
4Close the SD card cover.
Memo :
0When both slots are inserted with usable SD
cards, the previously selected slot is used.
Caution :
0Data may be lost if you turn off the power of the
camera recorder or remove the SD card when it
is being accessed. All data recorded on the
card, including the file that is being accessed,
may be corrupted. Be sure to check whether the
status indicator is lit in green or turned off before
you turn off the power or remove the SD card.
0If you mistakenly remove the card when it is
being accessed, reinsert the card only after the
status indicator goes off.
0The SD card may not be recognized if you insert
and remove the card within a short time. When
this happens, remove the card and wait for a few
seconds before you reinsert.
SD Card 41
Preparations
Switching the SD cards
When both card slots are inserted with SD cards,
you can use the [SLOT SEL] button to switch the
card to use.
When the memory on an SD card is full during
recording, data recording automatically switches to
the other card.
.
Memo :
0The [SLOT SEL] button is disabled during
recording or playback. Cards will not be
switched even if you press the button.
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards
When the following cards are inserted, [!FORMAT]
appears at the remaining media display area.
Format the card using the camera recorder menu.
0Unformatted SD cards
0SD cards formatted under different
specifications
* For details of the menu operation, refer to
“[Basic Operations in Menu Screen]
(A P 92)”.
Caution :
0Be sure to format the SD card on this camera
recorder. SD cards formatted on a PC and other
peripheral equipment cannot be used on this
camera recorder.
0[!RESTORE] appears at the remaining media
display area when an SD card that requires
restoring is inserted.
1Select [System] B [Media] B [Format
Media].
(A P113 [ Format Media ] )
2Select the slot of the SD card to be
formatted and press the Set button (R).
.
2
Set
Format Slot
Format Slot
Format Media
3The status of the selected SD card appears.
4Select [Format] and press the Set button
(R).
.
4
Set
Cancel
Format
Format Media
5Formatting starts.
.
Formatting...
42 SD Card
Preparations
6Formatting is complete.
When formatting is complete, “Complete” appears
and the camera recorder returns to the [Format
Media] screen.
Memo :
0During formatting, menu operation is
unavailable but you can start recording.
However, this is only available when a
recordable SD card is inserted in the other slot.
0Formatting cannot be performed in the following
cases.
0Recording is in progress on the SD card to be
formatted.
0SD card is not inserted.
0Write-protect switch of the SD card is set (z
is displayed).
Caution :
0If you format the SD card, all data recorded on
the card, including video data and setup files,
will be deleted.
Restoring the SD Card
It is necessary to restore the SD card if an
abnormality occurs to the data in the card due to
some reasons.
Memo :
0[!RESTORE] appears at the remaining media
display area when an SD card that requires
restoring is inserted.
1Select [System] B [Media] B [Restore
Media].
(A P113 [ Restore Media ] )
2Select the SD card to be restored and press
the Set button (R).
.
2
Set
Restore Slot
Restore Slot
Restore Media
3Restoring starts.
.
Restoring...
4Restoring is complete.
0When restoring is complete, “Complete”
appears and the camera recorder returns to the
[Restore Media] screen.
0When no media that requires restoring is
inserted, the camera recorder returns to the
[Media] menu screen.
Caution :
0[Restore Media] can only be selected in Camera
mode. However, it cannot be selected while the
camera recorder is recording. Select [Restore
Media] in Camera mode when the camera
recorder is not recording.
0[Restore Media] does not restore the SD card to
its original states completely. If restoring fails,
replace or format the SD card. Take note that
formatting erases all the information inside the
SD card.
0Restoring cannot be performed in the following
cases.
0Camera recorder is recording in progress.
0SD card is not inserted.
0Write-protect switch of the SD card is set (z
is displayed).
SD Card 43
Preparations
Clips Recorded to SD Cards
Folders in the SD Card
The captured image is recorded into different
folders according to the [System] and [WFormat]/
[YFormat] settings.
System WFormat/
YFormat Record Folder
4K/HD/SD/
Web
QuickTime DCIM
HD/SD/
Web
AVCHD PRIVATE/AVCHD
Memo :
0By formatting (initializing) the SD card from the
[Format Media] menu on the camera recorder,
folders required for recording in the current
[System] settings will be generated.
0When the [System] settings and [QuickTime]
settings are changed, folders required for
recording in those settings will be automatically
generated.
Caution :
0When a clip inside the folder is moved or deleted
using the Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac),
recording to the SD card may fail if formatting
(initializing) of the card is not performed.
Clip (Recorded Data) and Clip Name
0When recording is stopped, the images, audio
and accompanying data which are recorded
from start to stop are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
0An 8-character clip name is automatically
generated for the recorded clip.
(“Clip Name Prefix” + “Clip Number”)
0When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record Format] B [WFormat] is set to
“AVCHD”, the clip name generated consists of
only the Clip Number (5-digit number).
(A P115 [ W Format ] )
Example: QuickTime
.
ABCG0001
This is set to “xxxG” (“xxx” denotes the last 3
digits of the serial number) by default.
Clip Name Prefix (any four alphanumeric characters)
The Clip Number can be reset in
the menu.*
A number in automatic
ascending order is assigned in
the recording order.
Clip Number
* [Clip Set] B [Reset Clip Number]
(A P118 [ Reset Clip Number ] )
Memo :
0Before recording starts, you can set any
characters for the clip name prefix by using
[Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set] B [Clip
Set] B [Clip Name Prefix].
(A P118 [ Clip Name Prefix ] )
0Changes cannot be made after recording.
Recorded Clips
0The recorded materials may be split into several
files but they can be played back continuously
on the camera recorder.
0Clips may be recorded across the two SD cards
in card slots A and B depending on the recording
time of the clip.
Caution :
0A clip recorded across several cards cannot be
played back continuously. Continuous playback
is only possible when the recording is made on
one card.
44 SD Card
Preparations
Operation Lock Feature
You can use this feature to prevent erroneous
camera operation.
.
1While in the Camera mode (when the
display screen appears), press and hold
the [CANCEL] button for 5 seconds or
longer.
0The operation lock turns on, and an operation
lock icon (r) appears on the display
screen.
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P  15000K
0Press the [CANCEL] button again for 5
seconds or longer to turn off the operation
lock.
Memo :
0The operation lock feature is only valid in the
Camera mode.
(A P18 [Operation Modes] )
0The power turns off and the operation lock is
disengaged.
0The following remote operations are possible
even when the operation lock feature is turned
on (“On”).
0Remote operation from the wired remote
control connected to the [REMOTE] terminal.
0Remote operation of the camera through
access via a browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
Operation lock does not apply to the following
buttons and switches.
0[POWER ON/OFF] switch
0[INPUT1]/[INPUT2] Audio input signal selection
switch O
0[CH1]/[CH2] Audio input signal selection switch
O
0[CH1 AUTO/MANUAL]/[CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]
Audio recording mode switch O
0Focus ring
0Zoom lever at the grip/Zoom lever at the handle
O/Zoom ring at the lens section
0[ZOOM L/M/H] Zoom Speed Switch O
0Iris Dial
0[REC/HOLD] Record Trigger Button/Lock
Switch O
0[REC] button (on the grip)
0Visibility Adjustment Lever
0User button that has been assigned with the
[Rec] function.
Operation Lock Feature 45
Preparations
Basic Shooting
Procedures
Preparations
.
1
3
4
4
2
1Supply battery or AC adapter power to the
camera recorder.
(A P29 [Power Supply] )
2Insert an SD card.
(A P40 [SD Card] )
3Turn on the power of the camera recorder.
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the center of
the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set to “ON”. The
camera recorder starts up in Camera mode and
is ready for recording.
4Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor and
viewfinder.
(A P37 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
Shooting
The [FULL AUTO] button of this camera recorder
is set to “ON” by default, the following video items
are automatically adjusted.
0Iris
0Gain
0Shutter
0White balance
The audio recording level is also automatically
configured, and audio from the built-in microphone
is recorded.
When the [FULL AUTO] button is set to “ON”, the
v icon appears at the lower center area of the LCD.
.
AE+6
ND 1 / 1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00: 00:00.00
4030 20 10 0P 15 00 0K
* Press and hold the [FULL AUTO] button to
switch the Full Auto mode ON and OFF.
Memo :
0To set each individual video setting item
automatically or manually, and to carry out the
audio input settings and the audio recording
level adjustment, refer to the following.
0[Adjusting the Brightness] (A P 54)
0[Adjusting the Iris] (A P 55)
0[Setting the Gain] (A P 57)
0[Setting the Electronic Shutter] (A P 58)
0[Adjusting the White Balance] (A P 60)
0[Selecting Audio to Be Recorded in Each
Channel O] (A P 65)
0[Adjusting the Audio Recording Level O]
(A P 66)
.
46 Basic Shooting Procedures
Shooting
1Press the [REC] button to start recording to
the SD card.
This camera recorder has two [REC] buttons.
Any of the [REC] buttons can be used to start/
stop recording by default.
The tally lamp lights up in red during recording.
0Zoom Operation
(A P49 [Zoom Operation] )
0Adjusting the Focus
(A P50 [Focus Operation] )
Memo :
0If both the slots are loaded with recordable cards
in the factory default, pressing the [REC] button
starts recording only to the media in the selected
slot.
When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Slot Mode] is set to “Dual”, recording can be
performed simultaneously to the cards in both
the slots.
(A P74 [Dual Rec] )
0The tally lamp can be turned off in [System] B
[Tally Lamp].
(A P113 [ Tally Lamp ] )
2Check the most recently captured images.
0Press the [C.REVIEW/4] button to activate
the Clip Review function. The most recently
captured images are played back on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen.
0After playback, the camera recorder returns
to standby mode (STBY).
(A P73 [Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)] )
Memo :
0[Clip Review] is assigned to the [C.REVIEW/4]
button in factory default.
0[Clip Review] can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
Selecting System
Definition, File Format and
Video Format
You can select the resolution of the recorded
videos (4K, HD, SD, or Web), file format for
recording/playback, and the video recording
format on this camera recorder.
Setting the Record Format Menu
1Set [System], [Format], [Resolution],
[Frame Rate] and [Bit Rate] in [Main Menu]
B [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format].
2Set each of the items.
A[Selecting a System Definition] (A P 47)
B[Selecting a File Format] (A P 48)
C[Selecting a Video Format] (A P 48)
D[Selecting the Aspect Ratio of SD Videos]
(A P 49)
3After setting is complete for all items, press
the [LOLUX/3] button.
0The recording format is switched.
0A “Please Wait...” message appears on the
screen during switching.
Selecting a System Definition
There are four different definitions for selection.
04K:
Records in 4K resolution (3840x2160)
0HD:
Records in HD (High Definition) resolution
(1920x1080 or 1280x720)
0SD:
Records in SD (Standard Definition) resolution
(720x480 or 720x576)
0Web:
Records in resolution (1440x1080, 960x480,
720x480, 720x576, or 480x270) suitable for web
distribution
You can select a definition for the recorded images
from the following items under [System].
04K:
Records in 4K quality for both slots A and B.
0HD:
Records in HD quality for both slots A and B.
0SD:
Records in SD quality for both slots A and B.
0HD+Web:
Records in HD quality for slot A, and Web quality
for slot B.
(A P74 [Recording Simultaneously at Two
Different Definitions] )
Basic Shooting Procedures 47
Shooting
Selecting a File Format
Select a file format in [WFormat]/[YFormat].
There are two file formats for selection.
0AVCHD:
AVCHD file format
0QuickTime:
QuickTime file format (.MOV)
Memo :
0When [System] is set to “4K”, this item is fixed at
“QuickTime”.
Selecting a Video Format
0Select a [Record Format] from the list of formats.
The selectable [W Frame Rate]/[W Bit
Rate]/[Y Frame Rate] and [Y Bit Rate] change
according to the settings of [System]/
[WFormat]/[WResolution]/[YFormat], and
[YResolution].
List of Formats
The following is a list of file formats and video
formats that can be selected on this camera
recorder.
oWhen [System] is set to “4K”
Record Format
W Format W Resolution W Frame
Rate W Bit Rate
Quick Time
3840x2160 30p
25p
24p
150M
Memo :
0Each item for slot B is fixed at the same setting
as slot A.
oWhen [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”, the
options for slot A are:
Record Format
W
Format
W
Resolution
W
Frame
Rate
W
Bit Rate
QuickTime 1920x1080 60p
60i
50p
50i
30p
25p
24p
50M (YUV422)
50M (XHQ)
35M (UHQ)
1280x720 60p
50p 35M (UHQ)
AVCHD 1920x1080 60p 28M (HQ)
60i 24M (HQ)
18M (SP)
50p 28M (HQ)
50i 24M (HQ)
18M (SP)
Memo :
0When [WFormat] is set to “Quick Time” and
[WResolution] is set to “1920x1080”, the
selectable options for [WBit Rate] vary
according to the setting for [WFrame Rate].
0When [System] is set to “HD”, each item for slot
B is fixed at the same setting as slot A.
0When [System] is set to “HD+Web”,
“50M(YUV422)” cannot be selected.
oWhen [System] is set to “SD”
Record Format
W Format W Resolution W Frame
Rate W Bit
Rate
QuickTime
720 x 480 60i (U model) 8M
720 x 576 50i (E model)
AVCHD
720 x 480 60i (U model)
720 x 576 50i (E model)
Memo :
0Each item for slot B is fixed at the same setting
as slot A.
48 Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video Format
Shooting
oWhen [System] is set to “HD+Web”, the options
for slot B are:
Record Format
Y Format Y Resolution Y Frame
Rate Y Bit Rate
QuickTime
960 x 540 30p
25p
24p
3M (HQ)
720 x 480 60i 8M
720 x 576 50i
480x270 30p
25p
24p
1.2M (LP)
AVCHD
1440 x 1080 60i
50i 9M (LP)
5M (EP)
720 x 480 60i 8M
720 x 576 50i
Memo :
0The available options for [YResolution] and
[YFrame Rate] vary according to the settings for
slot A.
0The selectable options for YResolution vary
according to the [WFrame Rate] setting.
0[YFrame Rate] is fixed according to the
[WFrame Rate] setting.
Selecting the Aspect Ratio of SD Videos
For setting the aspect ratio of the SD recording
image when [System] is set to “SD”.
You can select “16:9” or “4:3”.
Memo :
0For conditions other than those above, this item
is fixed at “16:9”.
Zoom Operation
Adjusts the angle of view.
Optical zoom ratio: 1x to 12x
Dynamic zoom ratio: 12x to 24x
Set the dynamic zoom “On”/“Off” in [Main Menu] B
[Camera Function] B [Dynamic Zoom].
(A P97 [ Dynamic Zoom ] )
Zooming can be operated using any of the three
levers/rings below.
0Zoom Lever at the Grip
0Zoom lever at the Handle O
0Zoom Ring at the Lens Section
During the zoom operation, the zoom bar or
number will appear on the upper right corner of the
screen.
(A P130 [Zoom Display] )
.
Using the Zoom Lever at the Grip
1Press the zoom lever to zoom.
0The zoom speed changes according to the
extent the zoom lever is being pushed.
0Zooms into wide angle and increases the
angle of view when “W” is pressed.
0Zooms into telephoto and decreases the
angle of view when “T” is pressed.
Using the Zoom Lever at the Handle O
1Set the zoom speed individually in [Main
Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Handle
Zoom Speed L]/[Handle Zoom Speed M]/
[Handle Zoom Speed H].
Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video Format 49
Shooting
0Set the zoom speed for “L”, “M” and “H” of the
[ZOOM L/M/H] zoom speed switch
individually.
Increasing the value increases the zoom
speed.
(A P97 [Handle Zoom Speed L/Handle Zoom
Speed M/Handle Zoom Speed H O] )
Memo :
0The zoom lever on the handle is disabled when
“Off” is selected.
2Set the [ZOOM L/M/H] zoom speed switch
to any of the settings.
3Press the zoom lever at the handle to zoom.
0The zoom operation is performed in the
speed that has been set.
Using Zoom Ring at the Lens Section
You can adjust the preferred angle of view by
turning the zoom ring.
Saving/Recalling Current Zoom
Position (Preset Zoom)
This allows you to register up to three zoom
positions.
1Assign the “Preset Zoom1”, “Preset
Zoom2”, or “Preset Zoom3” function to any
of the user buttons.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
(A P98 [USER1 ~ USER9, LCD KEY▲/LCD
KEY▶/LCD KEY▼/LCD KEY◀] )
2Save the current zoom position.
0Press any of the user buttons assigned with
the “Preset Zoom1”, “Preset Zoom2”, or
“Preset Zoom3” function for more than 1
second.
0The current zoom position will be stored.
3Recall the stored zoom position.
0Press any of the user buttons assigned with
the “Preset Zoom1”, “Preset Zoom2”, or
“Preset Zoom3” function and release within 1
second.
0The camera recorder zooms to the stored
zoom position.
Memo :
0The zoom speed to the zoom position can be set
in [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [User
Switch Set] B [Preset Zoom Speed].
(A P99 [ Preset Zoom Speed ] )
0Operating other zoom maneuvers during a
zoom position recall will cancel the recall.
Focus Operation
.
Adjusting Focus Automatically
1Press the [AF/MF] selection button to set to
Auto Focus mode.
There is no icon display in Auto Focus mode.
Memo :
0If [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [AF
Assist] is set to “Area” or “Far/Near”, you can turn
the focus ring to shift the auto focus point while
in the automatic focus adjustment mode.
(A P97 [ AF Assist ] )
0When face detection is enabled, the Auto Focus
icon e appears with the face mark.
(A P53 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face
Detection] )
(A P98 [ Face Detect ] )
One Push Auto Focus
If [Push AF/AF Lock] is assigned to the user button,
pressing the assigned user button (within 1 minute)
while in the Manual Focus mode makes the camera
recorder focus on the center of the frame
automatically.
Memo :
0Face detection does not work during One Push
Auto Focus.
0AF Assist does not function.
0When the operation is complete, the camera
recorder returns to the Manual Focus mode
automatically.
0One Push Auto Focus functions with emphasis
on the focusing speed. This function is not
suitable during recording.
50 Zoom Operation
Shooting
Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily
(Push Auto Focus)
0If [Push AF/AF Lock] is assigned to the user
button, the camera recorder will shift to Auto
Focus mode temporarily and automatically
adjusts focus when the assigned user button is
held down during shooting in Manual Focus
mode.
0Release the user button assigned with [Push AF/
AF Lock] to return to Manual Focus mode.
Memo :
0Face detection does not work during Push Auto
Focus.
Locking the Focus
When the [Push AF/AF Lock] function is assigned
to a user button in the Auto Focus mode, pressing
this button locks the focus on the corresponding
point.
An icon appears when the focus is locked.
Memo :
0Performing any focusing operation when the
focus is locked disengages the focus lock.
Adjusting Focus Manually
1Press the [AF/MF] selection button to set to
Manual Focus mode.
The manual focus icon d appears on the
screen.
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 / 16
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2014
00:00: 00.00
5 . 6 f t
4030 20 10 0P 15000K
Memo :
0The d icon appears even when [Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Focus] is set
to “Off”.
(A P107 [ Focus ] )
2Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.
Memo :
0Using the Focus Assist or Expanded Focus
function makes it easier to focus.
(A P52 [Focus Assist Function] )
(A P52 [Expanded Focus Function] )
0If [Push AF/AF Lock] is assigned to the user
button, pressing the assigned user button while
in the Manual Focus mode activates the One-
push Auto Focus mode, and holding down the
button activates the Push Auto Focus mode.
(A P50 [One Push Auto Focus] )
(A P51 [Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily
(Push Auto Focus)] )
AF Assist Function
To shift the auto focus point during Auto Focus
(AF), you can turn the focus ring to set the point to
the left, center, right, or near and far directions.
0Set [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [AF
Assist].
0Far/Near:
This option allows you to shift the auto focus
point to near and far directions by turning the
focus ring during AF.
Focus is automatically adjusted to a focus
point near the position where the focus ring
stops turning.
0Area:
Selecting this option displays the icon in
the area.
Turning the focus ring during AF displays the
focus area on the left, center, and right side
for about 2 seconds. Turning the focus ring
within 2 seconds allows you to move the
orange frame to select the focus area.
After selecting the area, focus is
automatically adjusted to a focus point near
the selected area.
.
1/100
F1 . 6
18dB
00: 00 : 00. 00
4030 20 10 0P  15000K
* The icons ( , , and ) change in
conjunction with the orange frame in the focus
area.
Memo :
0When [Face Detect] is set, the AF Assist
function is not selectable.
Focus Operation 51
Shooting
Focus Assist Function
0When the [F.ASSIST/1] button is pressed during
shooting, the focused area is displayed in color.
This enables easy and accurate focusing.
0Select the color (blue, red or green) in the menu.
Memo :
0When [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [Shooting
Assist] B [Focus Assist] B [Type] is set to
“ACCU-Focus”, the depth of field becomes
shallower to enable easier focusing.
(A P105 [ Focus Assist ] )
0The “ACCU-Focus” function switches
automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.
0Select the display color in [Main Menu] B [LCD/
VF] B [Shooting Assist] B [Focus Assist] B
[Color].
(A P105 [ Color ] )
0If you use the zebra function and the Focus
Assist function at the same time, it may be
difficult to see the effect of the Focus Assist. In
this case, turn off the zebra function.
Setting Focus Assist Function to a User Button
You can assign the “Focus Assist” function to a user
button.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
Expanded Focus Function
You can magnify the preferred area by pressing the
[EXPANDED FOCUS/8] button; doing so enables
precise focus to be established easily.
* You can also use the user button assigned with
the “Expanded Focus” function instead of the
[EXPANDED FOCUS/8] button.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
(A P98 [USER1 ~ USER9, LCD KEY▲/LCD
KEY▶/LCD KEY▼/LCD KEY◀] )
1Press the [EXPANDED FOCUS/8] button.
0“EXPANDED” (yellow color) appears on the
screen, and the center part of the image is
enlarged if this button is pressed for the first
time.
0For subsequent operation of the button, the
area at which the operation was last
performed will be enlarged.
.
1/100
F1 . 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
EXPANDED
EXPANDED
P 15 00 0K
EXPANDED
EXPANDED
2Use the cross-shaped button (JKH I) to
magnify the preferred area.
0The portion that is being magnified is
displayed at the lower left corner of the
screen.
3Press the [CANCEL/STOP] button to cancel
the setting.
Memo :
0The display of the enlarged screen is dot by dot
equivalent.
0To set the operation when the button is pressed,
go to [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [User
Switch Set] B [Expanded Focus].
(A P99 [ Expanded Focus ] )
0Pressing and holding the Center Set button (R)
resets the position of magnification.
0This function can be used together with the
Focus Assist function.
0When [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [AF
Assist] is set to “Area”, the center of each area
(left/center/right) is enlarged.
(A P97 [ AF Assist ] )
0The magnification ratio varies with the format of
the record signals.
0Magnifying an image does not alter the size of
the recorded image.
0If the “Expanded Focus” function is assigned to
the cross-shaped button, the cross-shaped
button cannot be used as user button while the
area is being magnified.
0This function is unavailable when [Main Menu]
B [System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format]
B [System] is set to “SD”.
52 Focus Operation
Shooting
Adjusting the Focusing by
Face Detection
This function detects human faces and
automatically adjusts focus during Auto Focus.
It can also track moving objects.
When several faces are detected, you can select
one to focus on.
Memo :
0This function can also adjust the brightness
automatically according to the brightness of the
face detected.
(A P98 [ Face Detect ] )
.
1Assign the “Face Detect” function to any of
the user buttons.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
2Focus the camera recorder on a person and
press the user button that is assigned with
“Face Detect”.
0When Face detection is enabled, the face
detection icon (q) appears.
0When [Main Menu] B [Camera Function]
B [User Switch Set] B [Face Detect] is set
to “AF”, “q e” appears.
0When [Main Menu] B [Camera Function]
B [User Switch Set] B [Face Detect] is set
to “AF&AE”, “q AE±0” appears.
0If you select the person nearest to the center
of the screen, an orange frame will appear on
his face.
0Focus will be automatically adjusted for the
selected person.
.
Detection Frame (Orange)
AE 
Memo :
0If the detection frame does not appear, make
sure that Auto Focus mode is selected. Also, if
[Face Detect] is set to “AF&AE”, set at least one
of the iris, gain, and electronic shutter control
items to the automatic adjustment mode.
(A P54 [Adjusting the Brightness
Automatically: Automatic Brightness Adjustment
(AE) Mode] )
(A P55 [Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment)
Mode] )
(A P57 [Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic
Gain Adjustment)] )
(A P58 [Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic
Shutter Adjustment)] )
Adjusting the Focusing by Face Detection 53
Shooting
Selecting Specific Person from Several
Persons
1Hold down the user button that is assigned
with “Face Detect”.
0The camera recorder will enter face selection
mode and the face detection icon (q) will
blink.
0An orange frame will appear on the face of
the person nearest to the center of the
screen. Blue frames will appear on the faces
of others.
.
Detection Frame (Blue)
Detection Frame (Orange)
Blinking
2Select a specific person.
0Use the cross-shaped button (HIJK) to
select a person.
0An orange frame will appear on the face of
the selected person and focus will be
automatically adjusted.
.
Detection Frame (Blue)
Detection Frame (Orange)
3Press the Set button (R) to confirm the
person for face detection.
Memo :
0Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel the
selection.
0You can specify the detection sensitivity and the
operation speed after losing sight of the face
using [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B
[User Switch Set] B [Face Detect] B [Sensitivity]
and [Hysteresis].
(A P98 [ Sensitivity ] )
(A P98 [ Hysteresis ] )
Adjusting the Brightness
Adjust the brightness using Iris, Gain, Shutter
speed and ND filter according to the brightness of
the object.
Adjusting the Brightness Automatically:
Automatic Brightness Adjustment (AE)
Mode
Iris, Gain, Shutter speed and ND filter are
automatically adjusted according to the brightness
of the object to maintain optimum brightness.
.
To set only the Gain, Iris and Shutter to Auto mode,
press and hold the [FULL AUTO] button and set the
Full Auto mode to off before setting each item to the
automatic adjustment mode.
1Set Gain, Iris and Shutter to Auto mode.
0[Adjusting the Iris] (A P 55)
0[Setting the Gain] (A P 57)
0[Setting the Electronic Shutter] (A P 58)
2Set the target level (brighter/darker) to
maintain optimum brightness during
automatic adjustment.
0When “AE±*” (* denotes number) appears on
the screen, press the [AE LEVEL] button on
the side of the camera recorder to display “AE
±*” against a white background and set using
the J / K volume buttons.
.
AE+6
ND 1/16
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0 P 150 00 K
54 Adjusting the Focusing by Face Detection
Shooting
Memo :
0Pressing and holding the [FULL AUTO] button
to enter the Full Auto mode also activates the
automatic brightness adjustment (AE) mode. In
this case, the White Balance also enters into
Auto mode forcibly.
0Pressing and holding the [AE LEVEL] button
clears the value specified and fixes at “AE±0”
(recommended value).
0The convergence speed of the automatic
adjustment for automatic brightness adjustment
(AE) can be set in the menu.
(A P96 [ AE Speed ] )
0If one or more of the items (Gain, Iris and
Shutter) have been set to Auto mode, the value
of the corresponding items when the user button
that is assigned “AE Lock” is pressed can be
fixed.
(A P99 [ AE/FAW Lock ] )
0If one or more of the items (Gain, Iris and
Shutter) have been set to Auto mode, the
automatic brightness adjustment (AE) mode is
enabled.
Adjusting the Brightness Manually
Press and hold the [FULL AUTO] button to set to
Full Auto mode, some or all of the items (Iris, Gain
and Shutter Speed) can be manually adjusted.
1Press and hold the [FULL AUTO] button to
set Full Auto mode to off.
2Adjust the Iris, Gain and Shutter speed.
(A P55 [Adjusting the Iris] )
(A P57 [Setting the Gain] )
(A P58 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )
Memo :
0The brightness cannot be manually adjusted in
the Full Auto mode.
0If Iris, Gain and Shutter Speed are manually
adjusted, the [AE Level] setting is temporarily
disabled.
Adjusting the Iris
Adjust the aperture of the lens iris according to the
brightness of the subject.
.
Iris Dial
Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment) Mode
1Press and hold the [FULL AUTO] button to
set Full Auto mode to off.
2Press the [IRIS A/M] button to set to the
Auto Iris mode.
The iris is automatically adjusted according to
the brightness of the object.
The lens aperture value (F-number) is not
displayed in the Auto Iris mode.
Memo :
0Pressing and holding the [FULL AUTO] button
to enter the Full Auto mode also activates the
Auto Iris mode. In this case, the Gain, Shutter
and White Balance also enter into Auto mode
forcibly.
The switching operation of the [IRIS A/M] button
is disabled in the Full Auto mode.
0The iris open/close limit can be set in [Main
Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Auto Iris Limit
(OPEN)]/[Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)] during Auto
Iris.
(A P96 [ Auto Iris Limit (OPEN) ] )
(A P96 [ Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE) ] )
0To set the target level (brighter/darker) of the
auto iris, you can press and hold the [AE
LEVEL] button on the side of the camera
recorder and then change the level using the J /
K volume button.
0The convergence speed of the auto iris can be
set in the menu.
(A P96 [ AE Speed ] )
Adjusting the Brightness 55
Shooting
Manual Iris (Manual Adjustment) Mode
The aperture value (F-number) of the lens can be
set manually.
1Press and hold the [FULL AUTO] button to
set Full Auto mode to off.
2Press the [IRIS A/M] button to set to the
Manual Iris mode.
The lens aperture value (F-number) is
displayed.
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 / 16
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00:00: 00.00
5 . 6 f t
4030 20 10 0P 15 000 K
3Turn the iris dial to adjust the iris manually.
0Iris adjustment can be assigned to the zoom
ring.
Set [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B
[Zoom Ring] to “Iris”.
(A P97 [ Zoom Ring ] )
The open F-number of the aperture varies
according to the zoom position.
Wide [W] end : F1.2
Tele [T] end : F3.5
F-number Description
Decrease The subject appears brighter.
The focused range becomes
sharper, while the background is
blurred to produce a soft image.
Increase The subject appears darker.
Background of image becomes
focused as well.
Memo :
0If [One Push Iris] is assigned to the user button,
pressing the assigned user button while in the
Manual Iris mode activates the One-push Auto
Iris mode, and holding down the button activates
the Push Auto Iris mode.
0In addition to the [Iris] function, the iris dial can
also be assigned with the [Shutter] or [AE
Level] function.
(A P97 [ Iris Dial ] )
One Push Auto Iris
When [One Push Iris] is assigned to the user
button, press this button in the Manual Iris mode to
adjust the iris according to the brightness of the
subject.
Push Auto Iris
When [One Push Iris] is assigned to the user
button, press and hold down this button in the
Manual Iris mode to change to the Auto Iris mode
temporarily. The iris will be automatically adjusted
according to the brightness of the subject.
About the Iris F-number
Blurry effects due to “small aperture diffraction”
may occur when the diameter of the iris becomes
too small. When this phenomenon occurs, the F-
number on the screen turns gray to warn you that
the diffraction F-number of the iris has been
exceeded.
You are recommended to make appropriate use of
ND filters to prevent the F-number from turning
gray.
56 Adjusting the Iris
Shooting
Setting the Gain
This function electrically boosts the light sensitivity
when there is insufficient illumination on the object.
You can set the gain of the video amplifier
according to the brightness of the object. Select the
setting mode according to your shooting
conditions.
.
Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic Gain
Adjustment)
1Press and hold the [FULL AUTO] button to
set Full Auto mode to off.
2Set [Camera Function] B [GAIN L]/[GAIN
M]/[GAIN H] to “AGC”.
(A P97 [GAIN L/GAIN M/GAIN H] )
If an item specified with “AGC” is selected using
the [GAIN L/M/H] gain switch, the Auto Gain
Adjustment mode is enabled and the gain of the
video amplifier is automatically set according to
the brightness of the subject.
The sensitivity value (dB value) is not displayed
in the Auto Gain mode.
Memo :
0Pressing and holding the [FULL AUTO] button
to enter the Full Auto mode also activates the
Auto Gain mode. In this case, the Iris, Shutter
and White Balance also enter into Auto mode
forcibly.
0The switching operation of the [GAIN L/M/H]
switch is disabled in the Full Auto mode.
0The upper limit of the gain setting value during
AGC operation can be set in [Main Menu] B
[Camera Function] B [AGC Limit].
(A P96 [ AGC Limit ] )
Manual Gain Mode (Manual Gain
Switching)
1Press and hold the [FULL AUTO] button to
set Full Auto mode to off.
0Select the gain level of the video amplifier
using the [GAIN L/M/H] selection switch on
the camera recorder.
0The gain level appears on the screen.
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 / 16
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00:00: 00.00
5 . 6 f t
4030 20 10 0P 15 000 K
0The default positions of the switch are as
follows.
[L] : 0dB
[M] : 6dB
[H] : 12dB
2Select [GAIN L/M/H] that is not set to “AGC”
to switch to the Manual Gain mode.
Memo :
0You can change the gain value of each position
in the menu. Increasing the sensitivity causes
the screen to appear grainier.
0The camera recorder switches to the Auto Gain
mode when the gain value is set to “AGC”.
(A P97 [GAIN L/GAIN M/GAIN H] )
Setting the Gain 57
Shooting
Setting the Electronic
Shutter
You can change the shutter speed (time for each
shooting frame) using the electronic shutter
function. Electronic shutter can be adjusted
manually or automatically.
Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic
Shutter Adjustment)
.
1Press and hold the [FULL AUTO] button to
set Full Auto mode to off.
2Press and hold the [SHUTTER] button to
enter Automatic Shutter mode.
0The shutter speed will not be displayed.
0Automatic Shutter mode adjusts the shutter
speed automatically according to the
brightness of the object.
3Set the controllable range for the Automatic
Shutter in [Main Menu] B [Camera
Function] B [EEI Limit].
(A P96 [ EEI Limit ] )
Memo :
0Pressing and holding the [FULL AUTO] button
to enter the Full Auto mode also activates the
Automatic Shutter mode. In this case, the Iris,
Gain and White Balance also enter into Auto
mode forcibly.
0Switching of shutter speed with the J / K volume
buttons at the side of the camera recorder, and
switching of shutter mode with the [SHUTTER]
button are disabled in the Full Auto mode.
Manual Shutter Mode (Manual Shutter
Switching)
1Press and hold the [FULL AUTO] button to
set Full Auto mode to off.
2Press and hold the [SHUTTER] button to
enter Manual Shutter mode.
0The shutter speed appears on the screen.
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 / 16
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00:00: 00.00
5 . 6 f t
4030 20 10 0P 15 000 K
Memo :
0While in Manual Shutter mode, select “Step” or
“Variable” in [Camera Function] B [Shutter].
“Step” is the factory default.
(A P96 [ Shutter ] )
Switching Shutter Speed
When the [SHUTTER] button is pressed (for less
than 1 second) in the Manual Shutter mode to
display the shutter speed against a white
background, you can set the shutter speed using
the J / K volume buttons on the side of the camera
recorder. The settable shutter speed range differs
according to the video format setting.
Memo :
0To display Shutter in angle (DEG), set [WFrame
Rate] to “24p” or “25p”, and set [Shutter] in [LCD/
VF] B [Display Settings] to “DEG”.
(A P115 [ W Frame Rate ] )
(A P108 [ Shutter ] )
58 Setting the Electronic Shutter
Shooting
.
60p
60i
30p
50p
50i
25p
24p
J
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/120
1/100
1/100
1/50
1/50
1/48
1/24
1/12
K1/6
1/25
1/12.5
1/6.25
1/60
1/30
1/15
1/7.5
J
~
1/48.001/50.001/60.00
~
K1/30.00 1/25.00 1/24.00
1/9934 1/98631/10014
1/60
1/10000
1/250
1/1000
1/2000
1/4000
^
1/500
1/100
1/10000
1/250
1/120
1/1000
1/2000
1/4000
(Lower limit)
(Upper limit)
(Standard)
(Standard)
Variable
Step
Shutter Mode
Frame Rate
Setting the ND Filter
Use the ND filter to keep the lens aperture in the
appropriate range.
.
Switch according to the brightness of the object.
When the position on the switch is changed, the
selected position of the ND filter is displayed on the
LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
(A P127 [Display 2 screen] )
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 / 16
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00:00: 00.00
5 . 6 f t
4030 20 10 0P 15 00 0K
ND 1 / 1 6
Memo :
0When [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [Display
Settings] B [ND Filter] is set to “Off”, the position
of the ND filter will not be displayed.
(A P107 [ ND Filter ] )
0It is recommended to use the ND filter to set the
lens aperture to less than F8.
Setting the Electronic Shutter 59
Shooting
ND Filter Warning Display
In order to adjust the amount of light when you are
shooting at a relatively bright location, the diameter
of the iris may become extremely small, causing
blurry effects to occur as a result.
This phenomenon is known as “small aperture
diffraction”. You can make appropriate use of ND
filters to prevent it from occurring.
This unit displays an ND filter warning when
necessary to prompt you to select an appropriate
ND filter.
1Set [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [Display
Settings] B [ND Filter] to “On+Assist”.
(A P107 [ ND Filter ] )
2When the iris diameter becomes too small
while adjusting the light intensity, or when
an ND filter is used in a dimly-lit location,
the ND filter display starts blinking.
Adjusting the White
Balance
Adjust the white balance according to the color
temperature of the lighting. You can select the
adjustment mode according to the shooting
conditions.
As the color of the light (color temperature) varies
according to the light source, it is necessary to
readjust the white balance when the main light
source illuminating the subject changes.
.
Automatic White Balance Mode (FAW:
Fulltime Auto White balance)
1Press and hold the [FULL AUTO] button to
set Full Auto mode to off.
2Assign “FAW” (Full Auto White Balance) to
one of the three [WHT.BAL B/A/PRST]
switches.
0You can set the Full Auto White Balance
feature to either “A”, “B”, or “PRST” in
[Camera Function] B [FAW].
(A P97 [ FAW ] )
0If the position assigned with “FAW” is
selected using the [WHT BAL B/A/PRST]
switch, the Automatic White Balance mode is
enabled and an appropriate white balance is
automatically adjusted according to the color
temperature of the lighting on the subject.
Caution :
0The accuracy of [FAW] is inferior to that of Auto
White Balance.
0When the power of the camera recorder is
turned on with the [FAW] mode selected, it takes
about 15 seconds for the colors to stabilize.
60 Setting the ND Filter
Shooting
Memo :
0Pressing and holding the [FULL AUTO] button
to enter the Full Auto mode also activates the
Automatic Shutter mode. In this case, the Iris,
Gain and Shutter also enter into Auto mode
forcibly.
0Switching of the white balance with the
[WHT.BAL B/A/PRST] switch is disabled in the
Full Auto mode.
0When [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B
[User Switch Set] B [AE/FAW Lock] is set to “AE/
FAW”, the white balance when the user button
that is assigned [AE/FAW Lock] is pressed can
be fixed.
(A P99 [ AE/FAW Lock ] )
0If [White Balance] is assigned to the user button,
pressing the assigned user button will display
the FAW Paint Adjustment screen.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
FAW Paint Adjustment
You can fine-adjust the white balance that was
automatically adjusted.
1Select [Main Menu] B [Camera Process] B
[White Balance] B [FAW Paint] and press
the Set button (R).
The FAW Paint Adjustment screen appears.
.
1
FAW Paint
White Balance
2Adjust the R and B values.
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to adjust R
value and (HI) to adjust B value.
.
B
R
3Press the Set button (R).
Returns to the [White Balance] screen.
.
B Value
R Value
FAW Paint
White Balance
Manual White Balance Mode (Manual
Switching)
1Press and hold the [FULL AUTO] button to
set Full Auto mode to off.
0Use the [WHT.BAL B/A/PRST] switch to
select “PRST” (preset mode), “A” (memory A
mode), or “B” (memory B mode).
Memo :
0You can set the Full Auto White Balance feature
to either [A], [B], or [PRST] in [Camera
Function] B [FAW].
(A P97 [ FAW ] )
0In the FAW (Full Auto White Balance) mode, the
color temperature of the video is sampled
constantly and automatically to obtain the most
appropriate white balance level.
Preset Mode (PRST)
0Two different color temperature settings are
registered on this camera recorder. You can
switch between them using the [AWB/9] button.
* You can also use the user button assigned with
[AWB] instead of the [AWB/9] button.
(A P98 [User Switch Set Item] )
Default setting:
[Preset Temp.] : 3200K
[Alternative Temp.] : 5600K
1Set the [WHT.BAL B/A/PRST] switch to
“PRST”.
2Press the [AWB/9] button.
0Press the [AWB/9] button to switch to a
different color temperature.
(“Preset Temp.”1“Alternative Temp.”)
Adjusting the White Balance 61
Shooting
Setting the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative
Temp.] Values
You can change both the color temperature
settings in the Preset mode in the menu.
1Open the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative
Temp.] menu.
0
Select [Main Menu]
B
[Camera Process]
B
[White Balance]
B
[Preset Temp.] and
[Alternative Temp.], and press the Set button
(
R
).
0The Color Temperature setting screen
appears.
.
Color Temperature
Detailed Selection
Screen
Color Temperature Selection Screen
2Select the color temperature.
0When selecting from a setting value (Color
Temperature Selection screen), use the
cross-shaped button (JK) to select the color
temperature.
[Setting Values: 7500K, 6500K, 5600K,
5200K, 4800K, 4200K, 3200K, 3000K,
2800K]
0To select detailed values (Color
Temperature Detailed Selection screen)
0Press the cross-shaped button (I) to
display the Color Temperature Detailed
Selection screen.
0Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to
select a color temperature.
[Setting Values: 2300K to 15000K (in
100K increments)]
Memo :
0Use the cross-shaped button (I) to switch
between the Color Temperature Selection
screen and the Color Temperature Detailed
Selection screen.
0If [White Balance] is assigned to the user button,
pressing the assigned user button will display
the Color Temperature Selection screen.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
Memory A Mode (A), Memory B Mode
(B)
0Set to the white balance saved in Memory A or
Memory B.
0When the [WHT.BAL B/A/PRST] switch is set to
“A” or “B”, press the [AWB/9] button to execute
white balance. The white balance will be
automatically adjusted and the adjusted value
will be saved in Memory A or Memory B.
* You can also use the user button assigned with
[AWB] instead of the [AWB/9] button.
(A P98 [User Switch Set Item] )
1Prepare the camera recorder.
ASet the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “ON”.
BPress the [IRIS] button to set to the Auto mode.
CPress and hold the [FULL AUTO] button to set to
“OFF”.
2Set the [ND FILTER] switch according to the
lighting.
(A P59 [Setting the ND Filter] )
3Set the [WHT.BAL B/A/PRST] switch to “A” or
“B”.
4Locate a place with similar lighting conditions
as the object to be shot, place a white object
near the center of the screen and zoom in to
fill the screen with white.
5Press the [AWB/9] button.
0The white detection frame appears when Auto
White Balance is activated. Fill the frame with
white completely.
0While Auto White is starting up, “A<
y
>” or
“B<
y
>” appears on the screen. (
y
mark
appears blinking)
0After the correct white balance is obtained, an
estimated value of the current color
temperature is displayed.
62 Adjusting the White Balance
Shooting
.
1/100
F1 . 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00: 00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
1/100
F1 . 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00: 00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P  15000K
100min
50min
282min
A
3840x2160
30 p 150M
100min
50min
282min
3840x2160
30p 150M
Result Display
[AWB] Activating
White Detection
Frame
Blinking
Caution :
0Do not use highly reflective objects, such as
metals. Doing so may result in improper white
balance adjustment.
0The Auto White function cannot provide optimum
white balance with an object outside the
adjustment range, for example when it contains
only a single color or not enough white color.
Error Message
If the white balance adjustment is not correctly
completed, one of the following messages will
appear for about 3 seconds.
Message Status
Auto White　* NG:
Object
(*A or B)
Displayed when there is not
enough white color on the
object, or when the color
temperature is not suitable.
Use another white object and
adjust the white balance
again.
Auto White * Error:
Low Light
(*A or B)
Displayed when the lighting is
dark. Increase the lighting
and adjust the white balance
again.
Auto White * Error:
Over Light
(*A or B)
Excessive illumination.
Displayed when the lighting is
too bright. Decrease the
lighting and adjust the white
balance again.
White Paint Adjustment
You can fine-tune the white balance saved in
Memory A or Memory B.
1Select [Main Menu] B [Camera Process] B
[White Balance] B [AWB Paint] and press
the Set button (R).
The White Paint Adjustment screen appears.
.
1
AWB Paint
White Balance
2Adjust the R and B values.
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to adjust R
value and (HI) to adjust B value.
.
B
R
3Press the Set button (R).
Returns to the [White Balance] screen.
.
B Value
R Value
AWB Paint
White Balance
Memo :
0Executing Auto White Balance will usually clear
the White Paint Adjustment value. But when
[Main Menu] B [Camera Process] B [White
Balance] B [Clear Paint After AWB] is set to
“Off”, values will not be cleared even when Auto
White Balance is executed.
(A P103 [ Clear Paint After AWB ] )
0If [White Balance] is assigned to the user button,
pressing the assigned user button will display
the AWB Paint Adjustment screen.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
Adjusting the White Balance 63
Shooting
Adjusting the Camera
Image
The picture quality of the camera can be set using
the [Camera Process] menu.
As the adjustments are shown on the screen, you
can adjust the values while checking the picture
quality on the camera.
0[Detail]
0[Master Black]
0[Black Toe]
0[Knee]
0[White Clip]
0[Gamma]
0[WDR]
0[White Balance]
0[Color Matrix]
0[Color Gain]
Memo :
0For details of the respective items, see the
[Camera Process] menu.
(A P100 [Camera Process Menu] )
Using the Image Stabilizer
Reduces blurring of images due to camera shake.
1Check whether the image stabilizer feature
is turned ON or OFF.
If the image stabilizer icon (i/j) does not
appear on the screen display, the image
stabilizer function is OFF.
.
1/100
F1 . 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00:00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P 15 00 0K
2Press the [OIS/6] button to turn ON the
image stabilizer feature (when image
stabilizer feature is OFF).
The image stabilizer feature switches between
ON and OFF with every press of the [OIS/6]
button.
0OFF:
Use this setting when the camera recorder is
secured, such as when using a tripod.
0ON:
Reduces blurring of images due to camera
shake.
Memo :
0Select [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B
[OIS] B [Level] to set the correction level.
(A P96 [ Level ] )
0Correction by this feature may not be sufficient
when camera shake is too strong.
0“OIS” is assigned to the [OIS/6] button in factory
default.
0“OIS” can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
64 Adjusting the Camera Image
Shooting
Audio Recording
You can record audio from the two channels (CH1/
CH2) in synchronization with video images on this
camera recorder.
Select from the four options below to record the
audio.
0Built-in Microphone
0Microphone connected to [AUX] terminal
0Microphone connected to [INPUT1] terminal
O
0Microphone connected to [INPUT2] terminal
O
.
Selecting Audio to Be Recorded in Each
Channel O
Select the audio to be recorded in CH1/CH2.
- Switch Setting Connected Devices
CH1 INT 0Built-in Microphone
0Microphone connected to
[AUX] terminal
INPUT1 Microphone connected to
[INPUT1] terminal
CH2 INT 0Built-in Microphone
0Microphone connected to
[AUX] terminal
INPUT1 Microphone connected to
[INPUT1] terminal
INPUT2 Microphone connected to
[INPUT2] terminal
0When CH1 or CH2 is set to “INT” and a
microphone is connected to the [AUX] terminal,
audio is recorded according to the setting in
[Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [CH1
INT]/[CH2 INT].
(A P110 [ CH1 INT ] )
(A P110 [ CH2 INT ] )
Memo :
0When the [AUX] terminal is not connected,
[Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [CH1
INT]/[CH2 INT] is fixed at “Int. Mic L”/“Int. Mic
R” respectively.
Setting Input Channel to [INPUT1]/[INPUT2]
Select the audio to input to [INPUT1] and [INPUT2]
terminals with the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] mode
switch.
Setting Description
[LINE] Use this setting when connecting to
an audio device or other equipment.
The reference input level is +4 dBu.
[MIC] Use this setting when connecting to
a dynamic microphone.
[MIC+48V] Use this setting when connecting to
a microphone (phantom
microphone) that requires a +48 V
power supply.
Memo :
0When “MIC” or “MIC+48V” is selected, set the
reference input level in [Main Menu] B [A/V
Set] B [Audio Set] B [Input1 Mic Ref.]/[Input2
Mic Ref.].
(A P110 [Input1 Mic Ref./Input2 Mic Ref. O] )
Caution :
0When connecting a device that does not require
a +48 V power supply, make sure that it is not
set to the “MIC+48V” position.
0When the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] mode switch is
set to “MIC”, make sure that a microphone is
connected to the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] terminal. If
you increase the recording level when a
microphone is not connected, noise from the
input terminal may be recorded.
0When a microphone is not connected to the
[INPUT1]/[INPUT2] terminal, set the [INPUT1]/
[INPUT2] mode switch to “LINE” or adjust the
volume with the [CH1]/[CH2] recording level
adjustment knob.
Audio Recording 65
Shooting
Adjusting the Audio Recording Level
O
You can select to adjust the audio recording levels
for the two channels (CH1/CH2) manually or
automatically.
.
Manual Adjustment Mode (Manual
Adjustment)
0Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] switch on
the camera recorder to “MANUAL” to enter the
manual adjustment mode, and use the [CH1]/
[CH2] recording level adjustment knob to set the
recording level.
0You can adjust the level manually during the
recording, recording standby, and stop modes.
Memo :
0When the [FULL AUTO] button is set to “ON” and
[Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Audio
On FULL AUTO] is set to “Auto”, the [CH1
AUTO/MANUAL]/[CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]
selection switch is disabled.
(The above setting is the factory default.)
oSetting Input Channel to “INPUT1”/
“INPUT2”
1Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]
selection switch to “MANUAL” for the
channel to be adjusted manually.
2Turn the corresponding [CH1]/[CH2]
recording level adjustment knob to adjust
the level.
Adjust such that the audio level meter does not
light up at -2 dB even for loud sounds.
(A P111 [ Limiter Mode ] )
.
1/100
F1 . 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00: 00 : 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P 15 00 0K
4030 20 10 0
-2dB
oWhen the input channel is set to “INT” for
both [CH1] and [CH2]
1Set the [CH1 AUTO/MANUAL] selection
switch to “MANUAL”.
2Turn the [CH1] recording level adjustment
knob to adjust the level.
When the built-in microphone and the [AUX]
input terminal are used, the recording levels of
[CH1] and [CH2] are interlocked.
This is also effective when the [CH1 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switch is set to [CH2].
Memo :
0Select [Limiter Mode] or [Int. Mic Stereo
Enhancer] in the menu to set the recording
audio.
0For the reference level to be recorded to an SD
card, set [Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio
Set] B [Ref. Level] to “-20dB”, “-18dB”, or
“-12dB”. (common for CH1/CH2)
(A P110 [ Ref. Level ] )
0The operations of the [CH2] recording level
adjustment knob and [CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]
selection switch are disabled.
0When [Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B
[CH1 INT] and [CH2 INT] are set to “Int. Mic L”
and “AUX R” respectively, or set to “AUX L” and
“Int. Mic R” respectively, the settings of the [CH1
AUTO/MANUAL] and [CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]
selection switches become independent. In this
case, the recording level settings of CH1 and
CH2 are also independent.
Automatic Adjustment Mode
0
Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] selection
switch to “AUTO” or press and hold the [FULL
AUTO] button set to “ON” to enter Automatic
Adjustment mode. The audio recording level is
set automatically according to the input level.
0When the [FULL AUTO] button is set to “ON”,
mode switching with the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switch is disabled.
66 Audio Recording
Shooting
Memo :
0When [Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B
[Limiter] is set to “Off” while in the automatic
adjustment mode, the limiter operates at
-6 dBFS.
0When [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Audio On FULL
AUTO] is set to “SW Set”, you can switch the
audio recording mode with the [CH1/CH2
AUTO/MANUAL] selection switch on the
camera recorder even if the [FULL AUTO]
button is set to “ON”.
(A P112 [ Audio On FULL AUTO ] )
Setting the Audio recording Level in the
Main Menu
* Enabled only when the handle unit is not
attached.
1Select [Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio
Set] B [Audio Level].
0The [Audio Level] screen appears.
.
Audio Level
Manual
Auto Set
* The contents displayed on the screen vary
depending on the various settings.
2Select “Auto” or “Manual” using the
[LOLUX/3] button.
0If “Auto” is selected, the audio recording level
will be automatically adjusted.
0If “Manual” is selected, the volume appears
on the screen. Use the cross-shaped button
(H I) to adjust the volume.
Memo :
0When the [FULL AUTO] button is set to “On” and
[Audio On FULL AUTO] in the menu is set to
“Auto”, the audio recording level cannot be
selected.
0If both CH1 and CH2 are set to the built-in
microphone or to AUX, settings for CH2 will not
be displayed, and the settings for CH1 will apply
to CH2.
Monitoring Audio Sound
During Recording Using a
Headphone
You can check the recorded audio using
headphone.
.
1Connect the headphone.
2Select [Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio
Set] B [Monitor].
3Adjust the monitor volume using the J / K
volume buttons on the side of the camera
recorder.
Memo :
0There is no audio output from the monitor
speaker in Camera mode.
0Warning tone is output when there is an
abnormality in the camera recorder or when the
battery is low.
(A P174 [Warning Tone] )
0You can set the volume of the warning tone in
[Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Alarm
Level]. (“Off”/“Low”/“High”)
(A P112 [ Alarm Level ] )
Audio Recording 67
Shooting
Time Code and User’s Bit
Time code and user’s bit data are recorded with the
video in this camera recorder.
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the
viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or
recording. (Display screen)
Displaying Time Code and User’s Bit
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the
viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or
recording.
The display differs according to the menu settings.
1
Set [Main Menu]
B
[LCD/VF]
B
[Display
Settings]
B
[TC/UB] to settings other than
“Off”.
(A P107 [ TC/UB ] )
When “TC” or “UB” is selected, time code or
user’s bit data is displayed respectively on the
display screen.
.
1/100
F1 . 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00: 00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P 15 00 0K
00:00:00.00
FF EE DD 20
Time Code Operation Mode
Set the time code operation in [Main Menu] B [TC/
UB] B [TC Generator].
(A P103 [ TC Generator ] )
Setting Description
Free Run The time code operates in the run
mode at all times regardless of the
recording status.
It continues to run even when the
power of the camera recorder is
turned off.
Rec Run The time code operates in the run
mode during recording. It
continues to run in the order of the
recorded clips as long as the SD
card is not replaced. If the SD card
is removed and recording is made
on another card, time code will be
recorded on the new card from
where it was left off in the previous
card.
Regen The time code operates in the run
mode during recording. When the
SD card is replaced, the last time
code recorded on the card is read
and recorded on a new card so that
the time code continues in running
order.
(A P69 [Setting Time Code] )
Memo :
0When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Rec Mode] is set to “Interval Rec” or “Frame
Rec”, and [TC Generator] is set to “Free Run”,
Rec Run is activated.
0When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record Format] B [WFormat]/[YFormat] is
set to “AVCHD”, and [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Record Set] B [Rec Mode] is set to “Pre Rec”,
Free Run is activated.
(A P115 [ W Format ] )
(A P115 [ Y Format ] )
68 Time Code and User’s Bit
Shooting
Setting Time Code
Generator
Presetting the Time Code
Time code and user’s bit data generated from the
internal time code generator are recorded.
This section describes how to set [TC/UB] B [TC
Preset].
(A P103 [ TC Preset ] )
Memo :
0When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record Format] B [WFrame Rate] is set to
“50p”, “50i” or “24p”, setting for “Drop” will be
disabled.
(A P115 [ W Frame Rate ] )
0You can configure the setting without accessing
the [TC/UB] menu screen.
(A P70 [Setting Time Code without Opening
the Menu] )
Required Settings Before Preset
1Set [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] to “Rec
Run” or “Free Run”.
(A P103 [ TC Generator ] )
0[Rec Run]:
Preset data in the time code generator
operates in run mode during recording mode.
Set this when recording continuous time
code in connecting frames.
0[Free Run]:
Time code starts to operate in run mode from
the preset time in the time code generator.
2Select the framing mode for the time code
generator (only when the frame rate setting
is “60” or “30”).
Set using [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [Drop
Frame].
(A P104 [ Drop Frame ] )
0[Drop]:
Sets the run mode of the time code generator
to drop frame mode. Use this setting when
placing emphasis on the recording time.
0[Non Drop]:
Sets the run mode of the time code generator
to non-drop frame mode. Use this setting
when placing emphasis on the number of
frames.
Memo :
Drop frame/non-drop frame mode
0When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record Format] B [Frame Rate] is set to
“60p”, “60i”, or “30p”, the actual number of
frames per second is approximately 59.94
(29.97). However, the time code processing
standard is “60p”, “60i”, or “30p” frames. To
make up for the frame number discrepancy, the
drop frame mode (Drop) drops the 00 frame and
01 frame every minute except for minutes that
are multiples of 10. However, in the case of
“60p”, the 00, 01, 02 and 03 frame are dropped.
0The non-drop frame mode (Non Drop) does not
drop frames and ignores the discrepancy with
the actual time.
Setting Time Code
.
Setting Time Code Generator 69
Shooting
1Select [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [TC
Preset] and press the Set button (R).
(A P103 [ TC Preset ] )
The [TC Preset] screen appears.
.
1
TC Preset 00:00:00:00
TC/UB
Memo :
0When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to
“Regen”, the parameter is displayed as “Regen”
and cannot be selected.
(A P103 [ TC Generator ] )
2Set the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place the
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to change the values.
.
During drop frame
During non-drop
frame
Cursor
TC Preset 00:00:00:00
TC/UB
Memo :
0Press the [C.REVIEW/4] button to reset each
digit to “0”. The cursor moves to the time digit
(left).
3Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
0The time code is set and the screen returns
to [TC/UB].
0To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]
button.
4Press the [MENU] button.
Returns to the normal screen.
Setting Time Code without Opening the
Menu
.
Memo :
0Settings cannot be made in the following cases.
0[TC/UB] B [TC Generator] has been set to
“Regen”.
0Menu screen is displayed.
0The camera recorder is not in the Camera
mode.
Setting Time Code
1Set [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] to “Rec
Run” or “Free Run”.
(A P103 [ TC Generator ] )
2Press the [TC/2] button.
The [TC Preset] setting screen appears.
.
TC Preset
During drop frame
During non-drop frame
Cursor
3Set the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place the
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to change the values.
Memo :
0Press the [C.REVIEW/4] button to reset each
digit to “0”. The cursor moves to the time digit
(left).
70 Setting Time Code Generator
Shooting
4Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
0The time code is set and the screen returns
to the normal screen.
0To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]
button.
Caution :
0When the camera recorder is switched to Media
mode during editing, editing will be canceled
and the screen will close.
0When editing the time code, operation of the
buttons that are set in [Main Menu] B [Camera
Function] B [User Switch Set] is disabled.
[C.REVIEW/4] functions as the number reset
button.
(A P98 [User Switch Set Item] )
Recording Time Code in Continuation of
the Recorded Time Code on SD Card
This camera recorder is equipped with the time
code reader.
1Set [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] to “Regen”.
0When the camera recorder enters from
recording standby mode to recording mode,
it reads the time code already recorded on
the SD card and records the new time code
in continuation of that value.
0The same data as the user’s bit already
recorded on the SD card is recorded.
Memo :
0When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to
“Regen”, the framing mode of the time code
follows the settings in [TC/UB] B [Drop Frame]
instead of the clip settings.
(A P104 [ Drop Frame ] )
Setting the User’s Bit
You can add the date, time or an 8-digit
hexadecimal number as the user’s bit to the
recorded image.
.
Selecting a Recording Mode
Recording date/time information to the user’s
bit
1Set [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [UB Mode] to
“Date” or “Time”, and press the Set button
(R).
(A P103 [ UB Mode ] )
The date or time information is recorded to the
user’s bit.
Memo :
0When “Date” or “Time” is set, [Preset] appears
as “-” and cannot be set.
0“Time” is displayed in the 24-hour format.
Presetting the User’s Bit
Recording arbitrary information (8-digit
hexadecimal) to the user’s bit
Setting Time Code Generator 71
Shooting
1Set [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [UB Mode] to
“Preset”, and press the Set button (R).
(A P103 [ UB Mode ] )
The [UB Mode] setting screen appears.
.
2
TC/UB
UB Mode
Preset
Memo :
0When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to
“Regen”, the parameter is displayed as “Regen”
and cannot be selected.
(A P103 [ TC Generator ] )
2Select [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B “Preset”
and press the Set button (R).
The [Preset] setting screen appears.
3Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place
the cursor at the item to set, then use the
cross-shaped button (JK) to change the
values.
Numbers between 0 and 9 or alphabets
between A and F can be specified for the user’s
bit.
.
TC/UB
Cursor
Memo :
0
Press the [C.REVIEW/4] button to reset each digit
to “0”. The cursor moves to the left.
4Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
0The user’s bit is set and the screen returns to
[TC/UB].
0To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]
button.
5Press the [MENU] button.
Returns to the normal screen.
Setting Zebra Pattern
When the luminance level range for displaying
zebra patterns is specified, diagonal lines (zebra
pattern) are displayed at areas with the specified
luminance levels during shooting.
.
1Set the zebra display pattern.
Select the display pattern in [LCD/VF] B
[Shooting Assist] B [Zebra].
2Specify the brightness (luminance) level
range for displaying zebra pattern.
Specify the upper and lower limits of the
luminance level in [LCD/VF] B [Shooting
Assist] B [Zebra] B [Top] and [Bottom].
Item Settings Options
Top Upper luminance
limit for displaying
[Zebra]
5% - 100%, Over
(in 5 % increments)
Bottom Lower luminance
limit for displaying
[Zebra]
0% - 100% (in 5 %
increments)
3Display the zebra pattern.
Press the [ZEBRA/5] button to display the zebra
pattern in the specified range.
.
Memo :
0“Zebra” is assigned to the [ZEBRA/5] button in
factory default.
0“Zebra” can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
72 Setting the User’s Bit
Shooting
Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)
You can check (review) the last recorded video clip
on the screen.
However, the video clip cannot be played back if
the settings of the camera recorder are different
from the video format (Resolution/Frame Rate/Bit
Rate/SD Aspect) of the clip.
(A P115 [ W Resolution ] )
(A P115 [ W Frame Rate ] )
(A P115 [ W Bit Rate ] )
(A P116 [ SD Aspect ] )
Memo :
0To use this function, assign “Clip Review” to any
of the user buttons. “Clip Review” is assigned to
the [C.REVIEW/4] button in factory default.
0“Clip Review” can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
.
1Press the user button assigned with the
“Clip Review” function during standby
(“STBY” is displayed).
Playback of the configured section starts.
Memo :
0The video clip is played back according to the
setting in [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B
[User Switch Set] B [Clip Review]. By default
setting (Last 5sec), the last 5 seconds of the clip
is played back.
(A P98 [ Clip Review ] )
0When playback is complete, the camera
recorder exits Clip Review and returns to
“STBY” (recording standby) mode.
Caution :
0During Clip Review, only the [CANCEL] and
[REC] buttons are enabled.
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel clip review
and return to “STBY” (recording standby) mode.
Press the [REC] button to cancel clip review and
enter recording mode. It will take some time to
start recording after the button is pressed.
0When the last clip is less than 5 seconds, the
whole clip is played back.
0Only video clips in the currently selected slot can
be reviewed.
0When there are no clips in the selected slot, Clip
Review function is disabled.
0Clip Review is unavailable when Clip
Continuous Rec is paused (“STBYC”, yellow
text). To operate Clip Review, use the
[CANCEL] button to set to “STBYC” (white text)
first.
(A P79 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
0Clip Review is unavailable when the camera
recorder is connected to an external equipment
and the equipment is in recording state.
0Clip Review is unavailable when operating View
Remote via network connection.
(A P158 [View Remote Feature K] )
0Clip Review does not function during live
streaming. K
0Clip Review does not function while SDI Rec
Trigger is in the REC state. K
Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip Review) 73
Shooting
Recording
Simultaneously at Two
Different Definitions
By setting [System] to “HD+Web”, you can record
simultaneously at two different definitions.
0When HD+Web is selected:
Records a high-definition (HD) file to slot A and
a web file to slot B at the same time.
Web files can be used as a proxy file for the HD
file.
Memo :
0If a recordable SD card is inserted into only one
of the slots, files will only be recorded to that slot.
0The [Rec Mode] is fixed at “Normal”.
0Clip Cutter Trig is disabled.
0[Slot Mode] cannot be selected.
0Clip Review can only be performed for slot A.
(“No Media” appears if there is no card in slot A
while a card is inserted into slot B.)
0Playback of web files is only possible from slot
B when “HD+Web” is selected.
Series Rec
0Series Rec mode is specified in the factory
default.
([Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set] B [Slot
Mode] is set to “Series”.)
(A P117 [ Slot Mode ] )
0If both the slots are loaded with recordable
cards, pressing the [REC] button starts
recording only to the media in the selected slot.
When the remaining space in the selected
media runs out, recording continues by
automatically activating the media in the other
slot.
0There is no indication on the display screen
when the Series Rec mode is set.
Dual Rec
0If both the slots are loaded with recordable cards
in the Dual Rec mode ([Slot Mode] is set to
“Dual”), pressing the [REC] button starts
recording simultaneously to the media in both
the slots.
0The clips recorded to the media in both the slots
are identical, and two clips of the same content
can be created only on this camera recorder.
(A P117 [ Slot Mode ] )
.
Setting to Dual Rec Mode
1Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Slot Mode] to “Dual”.
(A P117 [ Slot Mode ] )
“DUAL” appears on the display screen.
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P  15000K
DUAL
74 Recording Simultaneously at Two Different Definitions
Shooting
2Start recording.
0Insert recordable media in both slots, and
press the [REC] button.
0In the Dual Rec mode, recording to the media
in both slots starts at the same time.
0Both the card slot marks turn red, and the
status indicators of both the card slots also
light up in red.
.
1/100
F1 . 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00: 00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P  15000K
100min
50min
REC
Lit in red
3Stop recording.
0Press the [REC] button again.
0Recording to both slots stops, and both the
card slot marks turn white.
0The same clips are recorded to both cards.
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P  15000K
100min
50min
White
Memo :
0Available when [System] is set to “4K”, “HD” or
“SD”.
(A P115 [ System ] )
0During recording in the Dual Rec mode, both the
card slot marks light up in red.
0During recording in the Dual Rec mode to two
cards with a different amount of remaining
space, if the space of one card runs out,
recording to both slots will stop automatically.
After recording stops, recording automatically
resumes for the card with remaining space.
Although the clips are separated in this case, the
clips can be seamlessly joined by arranging
them on the timeline of the editing software since
they are recorded seamlessly.
0
If the last clip on the cards that are inserted in the
two slots are different from each other, and the
time code operating mode is set to “Regen”, the
Regen mode for the selected card slot will be
enabled in the next recording.
Caution :
0To perform recording in the Dual Rec mode, it is
recommended that you start recording by
making use of two cards with the same capacity
and from the formatted state.
0
You can combine the use of the Dual Rec mode
with a special recording mode. While in the Dual
Rec mode, you can also set [Rec Mode] to
“Normal”, “Pre Rec”, “Clip Continuous”, “Interval
Rec”, or “Frame Rec”. When [Main Menu]
B
[System]
B
[Record Set]
B
[Record Format]
B
[
W
Format] is set to “AVCHD”, “Clip Continuous”
cannot be selected.
(A P78 [Special Recording] )
(A P116 [ Rec Mode ] )
(A P115 [ W Format ] )
0When both slots are inserted with recordable
cards, the Dual Rec (simultaneous recording)
operation can be performed. If a recordable
media is only inserted in one of the slots, you can
also start recording with one card.
0In the Dual Rec mode, continuous recording by
switching from one slot to another cannot be
performed. Continuous recording will not be
performed if a recordable media is inserted in a
slot after recording to the other slot has started.
0When recording to one slot is in progress with
the recorder set to the Dual Rec mode, inserting
a recordable media to the other slot does not
enable the Dual Rec operation. To perform the
Dual Rec operation, stop recording temporarily
(excluding pausing recording in the Clip
Continuous Rec mode), and start again.
0When one of the cards is accidentally removed
while recording is in progress in the Dual Rec
mode, recording to the card in the other slot will
continue. However, repair of the accidentally
removed card by the recovery function may fail.
0If an error occurs on one of the cards while
recording is in progress in the Dual Rec mode,
recording of the erroneous card stops, while that
of the other card continues.
0Operations on clips recorded in the Dual Rec
mode, such as clip deletion in the Media mode
or appending of OK marks, can only be
performed on the card in the selected slot.
Dual Rec 75
Shooting
Backup Rec
0The Backup Rec mode allows you to make use
of the media in slot B for backup recording by
controlling the starting and stopping of recording
in slot B without using the [REC] button.
0Start or stop the recording using [Main Menu] B
[System] B [Record Set] B [Slot Mode] B
[Backup Rec] or press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(A P117 [ Slot Mode ] )
(A P98 [User Switch Set Item] )
.
Slot B
Slot A
Clip 3
Clip 2
Clip 1
Clip 2
Slot B stops
recording
Slot A stops
recording
Slot A starts
recording
Slot B starts
recording
Memo :
0Available when [System] is set to “4K”, “HD” or
“SD”.
(A P115 [ System ] )
0During the Backup Rec mode (when [Slot
Mode] is set to “Backup”), you can control
recording to the 2 slots at different timings, and
backup recording can only be performed on this
camera recorder.
(A P117 [ Slot Mode ] )
0You can record without worrying about missing
the important scenes by setting slot B to be
always recording (backup recording) and using
the [REC] button to start/stop recording of only
the required scenes in slot A.
0It is recommended to use a media with high
capacity in slot B.
1Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Slot Mode] to “Backup”.
(A P117 [ Slot Mode ] )
“BACKUP” appears on the display screen.
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P  15000K
BACKUP
2Start backup recording. (Backup recording
into slot B)
0Select “REC” in [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Record Set] B [Slot Mode] B [Backup Rec]
and press the Set button (R).
(A P117 [ Slot Mode ] )
0You can also press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(A P98 [User Switch Set Item] )
0Backup recording into slot B starts. (The
characters “BACKUP” appear in red.)
0The card slot mark of slot B turns red
(selected state), and the status indicator of
slot B also blinks in red.
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P  15000K
100min
50min
100min
50min
Red (selected)
Red
76 Backup Rec
Shooting
3Start normal recording (normal recording
into slot A)
0Press any of the [REC] buttons.
0Recording into the media in slot A starts.
(The characters “RREC” appear in red.)
0The card icon of slot A turns red (unselected
state), and the status indicator of slot A blinks
in red.
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P  15000K
100min
50min
100min
50min
Red (not selected)
4Stop normal recording.
0Press any of the [REC] buttons again.
0Recording to slot A stops, and the card slot
mark of slot A turns white (unselected state).
0The characters “RREC” (red) changes back
to “STBY” (white).
0The status indicator of slot A goes out.
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P  15000K
100min
50min
100min
50min
White (not selected)
5Stop backup recording.
0Select [STBY] in [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Record Set] B [Slot Mode] B [Backup Rec]
and press the Set button (R).
(A P117 [ Slot Mode ] )
0You can also press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(A P98 [User Switch Set Item] )
0Recording to slot B stops, and the card slot
mark of slot B turns white (unselected state).
0The characters “BACKUP” changes back to
white.
0The status indicator of slot B lights up in
green.
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 /1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24,2015
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P  15000K
100min
50min
100min
50min
White
Memo :
0During backup recording, if the space of one
card runs out, recording stops only for the card
that is full.
0When recording to both slots is stopped,
recording in the Regen mode will be enabled for
the card slot in which recording started.
0When recording is started in the other slot while
recording to one slot, the clip being recorded is
split and simultaneous recording to the other
card starts.
0When recording is stopped for either slot A or B
while recording to both slots, the clip on the slot
which is still recording is split.
0Although the clips are separated during
recording the clips can be seamlessly joined by
arranging them on the timeline of the editing
software since they are recorded seamlessly.
0Clip Cutter Trig cannot be performed during
backup recording.
(A P82 [Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter
Trig)] )
0When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup”, [Rec
Mode] can only be set to “Normal”.
(A P116 [ Rec Mode ] )
Backup Rec 77
Shooting
Special Recording
Besides the normal recording mode, four special
recording methods are available in this camera
recorder. They are Pre Rec, Clip Continuous,
Frame Rec and Interval Rec.
Select a mode from [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Record Set] B [Rec Mode].
(A P116 [ Rec Mode ] )
Memo :
0
When [Main Menu]
B
[System]
B
[Record Set]
B
[Record Format]
B
[
W
Format] is set to “AVCHD”,
“Clip Continuous” cannot be selected.
(A P115 [
W
Format ] )
0
When [Main Menu]
B
[System]
B
[Record Set]
B
[Record Format]
B
[System] is set to “HD+Web”,
special recording cannot be selected
Pre Rec
0By setting the number of seconds in the [Pre Rec
Time], you can start recording video and audio
before actual recording starts based on the [Pre
Rec Time] setting.
0When starting actual recording while the camera
recorder is in Recording Standby (STBYP)
mode, you can start recording a few seconds
earlier based on the [Pre Rec Time] setting.
0Using Pre Rec allows you to record a complete
event without missing the initial scenes even if
you start the recording late.
Memo :
0Pre Rec Time can be set in [Main Menu] B
[System] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Pre
Rec Time].
The following values can be selected depending
on the setting of [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System].
0When [System] is set to “4K”:
Fixed at “5sec”
0When [System] is set to “HD” or “SD”:
“5sec”, “10sec” or “15sec”
(A P116 [ Pre Rec Time ] )
.
(Recording stops)
Press [REC]
(Recording starts)
Press [REC]
Recording starts a
number of seconds
earlier based on the
[Pre Rec Time] setting
(Recorded video and audio)
Completed Clip
1Set [Rec Mode] to “Pre Rec”.
(A P116 [ Rec Mode ] )
0Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] to “Pre Rec”.
0The display changes (“STBY” B “STBYP”).
2Press the [REC] button to start recording in
Pre Rec mode.
0The display changes (“STBYP” B
“RRECP”) and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
0Press the [REC] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECP”
B “STBYP”) and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green.
Caution :
0When the interval between start and stop
recording is short, “STBYP” may not be
displayed immediately after recording is
complete.
“RRECP” B “STBYP” (“STBY” blinks in red) B
“STBYP” is displayed.
0When the SD card becomes full during
recording, recording stops and “STOP” is
displayed.
0In the following cases, video and audio before
the specified Pre Rec time may not be recorded
even if recording starts.
0Immediately after power on
0Immediately after recording stops
0Immediately after switching from Media
mode to Camera mode
0Immediately after setting [Rec Mode]
0Immediately after the end of Clip Review
0Immediately after changing file format
0Immediately after changing video format
78 Special Recording
Shooting
Clip Continuous Rec
0In normal recording, when the recording stops,
the image, audio, and accompanying data from
the start till the end of the recording are recorded
as one “clip” on the SD card.
0This mode allows you to consolidate several
rounds of “startstop recording” into one clip.
Example:
In normal recording, three clips are generated as
Recording 1, Recording 2, and Recording 3.
However, recording in this mode generates only
one clip.
.
(Recorded video and audio)
Completed Clip
Recording 3
Recording 2
Recording 1
Recording 3
Recording 2
Recording 1
(Recording stops)
Press and hold [REC]
(Recording pauses)
Press [REC]
(Recording pauses)
Press [REC]
(Recording resumes)
Press [REC]
(Recording resumes)
Press [REC]
(Recording starts)
Press [REC]
1Set “Rec Mode” to “Clip Continuous”.
(A P116 [ Rec Mode ] )
0Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] to “Clip Continuous”.
0The display changes (“STBY” B “STBYC”).
2Start recording. (Recording 1)
0Press the [REC] button to start recording in
Clip Continuous mode.
0The display changes (“STBYC” B
“RRECC”) and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
3Pause recording.
0Press the [REC] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECC”
B “STBYC” (yellow text)).
0The card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
Memo :
0When the [CANCEL] button is pressed while the
camera recorder is paused (STBYC), the
display changes (“STBYC” (yellow text) B
“STBYC” (blinking yellow text) B “STBYC”
(white text)), and a “clip” is generated. The card
slot status indicator lights up in green.
4Resume recording. (Recording 2)
0Press the [REC] button again to resume
recording. The display changes (“STBYC”
(yellow text) B “RRECC”).
0The card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
5Pause recording.
0Press the [REC] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECC”
B “STBYC” (yellow text)).
0The card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
6Resume recording. (Recording 3)
0Press the [REC] button again to resume
recording. The display changes (“STBYC”
(yellow text) B “RRECC”).
0The card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
7Press and hold the [REC] button.
0Recording stops and the display changes
(“RRECC” B “STBYC”). A “clip” is
generated.
0The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
8Press the [REC] button again.
0The display changes (“STBYC” B
“RRECC”) and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
0A new “clip” is generated from here.
Special Recording 79
Shooting
Memo :
0Clip Continuous Rec cannot be used in the
following cases.
0When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [System] is set to “HD” or “SD”, and
[Format] is set to “AVCHD”
0When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [System] is set to “HD+Web”
0The following operations cannot be performed
while recording is paused (STBYC, yellow text).
0Clip Review operation
(A P73 [Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)] )
0Switching SD card slots
0Switching operation mode
(A P18 [Operation Modes] )
0Files are split into sizes of 4 GB (or 30 minutes)
regardless of the menu settings.
Caution :
0Do not remove the SD card during recording
(RRECC, red text) or recording pause
(STBYC, yellow text).
0To remove the SD card in the “Clip
Continuous” mode, press the [CANCEL] button,
check that “STBYC” (white text) is displayed
and the card slot status indicator lights up in
green before you remove the card.
0When the SD card becomes full during
recording, recording stops and “STOP” is
displayed.
0When the [POWER ON/OFF] switch is turned off
during recording or recording pause, recording
stops and power is cut off after a clip is
generated.
0If the power is cut off due to low battery power,
a proper clip may not be generated.
0When [WFormat]/[YFormat] in the [Main
Menu] B [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] menu is set to “AVCHD”, Clip
Continuous Rec cannot be performed.
(A P115 [ W Format ] )
(A P115 [ Y Format ] )
Frame Rec
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the
image and accompanying data from the start till the
end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
In this mode, recording starts with every press of
the [REC] button, and only the specified number of
frames is recorded.
The recording can be written to the media as a
single clip until it is stopped.
Memo :
0Audio will not be recorded.
0Until a specified amount of recordings is
accumulated, the file cannot be written to the
media.
0If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
0After the specified number of frames is recorded
and written to the media, recording will be
performed until the same number is
accumulated again.
.
Specific amount of data
Actual clips recorded to the media
Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
(Padding data)
Normal recording
PausePausePause
Recording resumes
Recording resumes
Press [REC]Press [REC]
(Frame Rec stops)(Frame Rec starts)
Press and hold [REC]Press [REC]
1Set [Rec Mode] to “Frame Rec”.
0Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] to “Frame Rec”.
(A P116 [ Rec Mode ] )
0The display changes (“STBY” B “STBYM”).
80 Special Recording
Shooting
2Set the number of frames to record in [Rec
Frames].
0Set using [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Frames].
(A P116 [ Rec Frames ] )
3Start recording.
0Press the [REC] button to record only the
number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
and pause.
0The display changes (“STBYM” B “RRECM”
B “STBYM” (yellow text)).
0The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
4Repeat Frame Rec.
0Press the [REC] button again to record only
the number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
0The display changes (“STBYM” B “RRECM”
B “STBYM” (yellow text)).
0Frame Rec continues until the recording is
stopped (step 5).
5Press and hold the [REC] button.
0The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
Caution :
0Do not remove the SD card during recording
(“RRECM”, red text) or recording pause
(“STBYM”, yellow text).
0To remove the SD card during Frame Rec, press
the [CANCEL] button, check that “STBYM”
(white text) is displayed and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green before you remove
the card.
0When [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [TC
Generator] is set to “Free Run”, the time code
will be recorded in “Rec Run”.
0Audio cannot be recorded. The audio level
meter is grayed out.
(A P128 [Audio Level Meter] )
Interval Rec
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the
image and accompanying data from the start till the
end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
In this mode, recording and pause are performed
repeatedly at the specified time interval. Only the
specified number of frames is recorded.
The recording can be written to the media as a
single clip until it is stopped.
Memo :
0Audio will not be recorded.
0Until a specified amount of recordings is
accumulated, the file will not be written to the
media.
0After the specified number of frames is recorded
and written to the media, recording will be
performed until the same number is
accumulated again.
0If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
.
Specific amount of data
Actual clips recorded to the media
Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
(Padding data)
Normal recording
PausePausePause
[Rec Interval][Rec Interval]
Recording resumes
Recording resumes
(Interval Rec stops)(Interval Rec starts)
Press [REC]Press [REC]
1Set [Rec Mode] to “Interval Rec”.
0Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] to “Interval Rec”.
(A P116 [ Rec Interval ] )
0The display changes (“STBY” B “STBYN”).
2Set the number of frames to record in [Rec
Frames].
Set using [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Frames].
(A P116 [ Rec Frames ] )
Special Recording 81
Shooting
3Set the time interval to start recording in
[Interval Rec].
Set using [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Interval].
(A P116 [ Rec Interval ] )
4Start recording.
0Press the [REC] button to record only the
number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
and pause.
0After the specified time in [Rec Interval] has
passed, recording starts again to record only
the number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
0Interval Rec continues until the recording is
stopped.
The display changes (“STBYN” B “RRECN”
B “STBYN” (red text) B “RRECN” B
“STBYN” (red text)).
0The card slot status indicator blinks in green.
5Press and hold the [REC] button.
0The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
0The display becomes “STBYN”.
Caution :
0Do not remove the SD card during recording
(RRECN, red text) or recording pause (STBYN,
yellow text).
0To remove the SD card during Interval Rec,
press the [CANCEL] button, check that “STBYN”
(white text) is displayed and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green before you remove
the card.
0When [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [TC
Generator] is set to “Free Run”, the time code
will be recorded in “Rec Run”.
0Audio cannot be recorded. The audio level
meter is grayed out.
(A P128 [Audio Level Meter] )
Splitting the Clips Freely
(Clip Cutter Trig)
You can split the clips freely without having to stop
recording during shooting.
1Assign the “Clip Cutter Trig” function to
any of the user buttons.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
2Press the user button that is assigned with
“Clip Cutter Trig” during shooting.
A clip cut icon (Q) appears on the display
screen for 3 seconds, and the clip is split.
.
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1/16
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00:00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P 15 00 0K
Memo :
0Clips cannot be split again for a few seconds
after the operation is performed.
0This item cannot be used when [Slot Mode] is
set to “Backup”.
0Available when [System] is set to “4K”, “HD” or
“SD”.
(A P115 [ System ] )
0This item cannot be used when [Rec Mode] is
set to a value other than “Normal” or “Pre Rec”.
(A P116 [ Rec Mode ] )
0The split clips are recorded seamlessly without
interruptions in the video.
82 Special Recording
Shooting
Playing Recorded Clips
To play back clips recorded on SD cards, switch to
the Media mode.
Press and hold the [MODE] selection button in
Camera mode to enter Media mode. A thumbnail
screen of the clips recorded on the SD card is
displayed.
You can play back the selected clip on the
thumbnail screen.
Memo :
0When an SD card without any clips is inserted,
“No Clips” is displayed.
Operation Buttons
Use the operation buttons, on the side control
panel of the camera recorder or the LCD monitor,
to operate the thumbnail screen.
.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H I
A[MENU/THUMB] Button
0Displays the menu.
0Press this button to close the menu screen
during menu display and return to the
thumbnail screen.
BCross-Shaped Button (JKHI)
Moves the cursor.
CSet (Play) Button
0Sets the values and items. (Confirm)
0Plays back the selected clip.
D[CANCEL] (Stop) Button
Cancels settings and returns to the previous
screen.
E[LOLUX/3] Button
0Switches the OK mark of the clip selected by
the cursor.
0If an OK mark has been appended, it will be
deleted. Otherwise, an OK mark will be
appended.
F[C.REVIEW/4] Button
0Switches the selection status of the clip
selected by the cursor.
0Clips being selected are displayed with
check mark.
G[ZEBRA/5] Button
Enters the action selection screen.
H[DISPLAY] Button
Switches between the “Standard Screen” and
“Detailed Screen”.
I[STATUS] Button
Displays the media information screen.
Thumbnail Screen
0“Standard Screen” and “Detailed Screen” are
available.
Use the [DISPLAY] button to switch between the
screens.
0Thumbnails are displayed in order of recording
from the oldest to most recent.
Standard screen
.
218G0005
AJ
H
C
B
G
E
D
F
I
K
2015-01-07 07:08:43
USER3 USER4 USER5
Actions
Select
OK Mark
ASD Card Information
0Displays the status of the inserted SD card,
selected SD card, write-protect switch, and
the need for restoring.
0Use the [SLOT A/B] switch to switch slots.
Clips in slot A and B cannot be displayed at
the same time.
W z:Write-protect switch of the SD card
in slot A is set.
S:SD card in slot B needs to be
restored or formatted, or is an
unsupported SD card.
BClip Mark
Displays the clip information (properties).
.
A
BD
E
C
AOK Mark
Clip is appended with OK mark.
Playing Recorded Clips 83
Playback
Memo :
0Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted on the camera recorder.
0When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record Format] B [WFormat] is set to
“AVCHD”, the OK mark indicates that the clip is
protected.
(A P115 [ W Format ] )
BContinued From Mark
This mark indicates that the current clip is
continued from another SD card when
recording is divided and made on several SD
cards.
CUneditable Mark
0This mark indicates that an OK mark cannot
be appended to or deleted from the clip, and
the clip cannot be deleted.
0When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Record Format] B [WFormat] is set
to “AVCHD”, clips that are not recorded on
this camera recorder cannot be edited.
DContinue Mark
This mark indicates that recording of the current
clip is continued to another SD card when
recording is divided and made on several SD
cards.
ECheck Mark
0A green check mark is displayed when the
clip is selected.
0Magenta and gray check marks are
displayed in multiple selection mode.
(A P89 [Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple Clips] )
CCursor
Clip to be worked on. Use the cross-shaped
button (JKHI) to move the cursor.
DThumbnail Substitution Display
.
A B
AA clip with corrupted management information.
It cannot be played back even if you press the
Set (Play) button.
BA clip that cannot be played back nor displayed
in thumbnail with the current video format
settings.
It cannot be played back even if you press the
Set (Play) button.
Memo :
0Dependent on the settings for [Main Menu] B
[System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B
[System]/[WResolution]/[YResolution]/
[WFrame Rate]/[YFrame Rate]/[WBit Rate],
and [YBit Rate].
(A P115 [ System ] )
(A P115 [ W Resolution ] )
(A P116 [ Y Resolution ] )
(A P115 [ W Frame Rate ] )
(A P116 [ Y Frame Rate ] )
(A P115 [ W Bit Rate ] )
(A P116 [ Y Bit Rate ] )
0When [Record Format] B [WFormat] is set to
“AVCHD”, you may not be able to play back files
recorded on a camera recorder other than the
GY-HM200 and GY-HM170 series.
If a file cannot be played back, the above
thumbnail substitution display 2 is displayed.
EClip Name
The file name (clip number) of the selected clip
is displayed.
FOperation Guide
0Displays a guide for the current operation
buttons.
0The action selection screen is displayed
when the User 5 ([ZEBRA/5]) button is
pressed.
(A P85 [Actions] )
GRecording Start Time
Displays the recording start time of the clip.
Memo :
0The date/time display is dependent on the [LCD/
VF] B [Display Settings] B [Date Style]/[Time
Style] settings in the [Main Menu] screen.
(A P108 [ Date Style ] )
(A P108 [ Time Style ] )
HScroll Bar
0Indicates the scroll position.
0Black space below the scroll bar (white)
indicates that there are more pages.
0When the scroll bar (white) is at the bottom,
this indicates the last page.
IRemaining Battery Power
(A P31 [Power Status Display] )
JNumber of Clips
0If none of the clips are selected, the “running
number/total number of clips” of the clip to be
displayed appears.
0Even if only one clip is selected, the number
of selected clips in the current slot is
displayed.
84 Playing Recorded Clips
Playback
KNetwork Connection Icon K
0The network connection status is displayed
when [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]
is set to “On”.
This icon is not displayed when “Off” is
selected.
(A P130 [Network Connection Icon K] )
Detailed screen
* Items that are common with the Standard screen
will not be described. Refer to “[Standard
screen] (A P 83)”.
.
C
B
A
Jan 24, 2015 12:34:56AM
Normal
Rec Mode
Audio
Video
Format
AThumbnail
Thumbnail of the clip selected by the cursor.
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to move the
cursor.
BScroll Mark (DE)
0If there are previous clips, D appears on the
left.
0If there are more clips, E appears on the right.
0The marks will not be displayed if there are
no clips before and after the current clip.
CMetadata
Metadata of the clip pointed by the cursor.
You can use the cross-shaped button (JK) to
scroll.
Actions
The action selection screen is displayed when the
User 5 ([ZEBRA/5]) button is pressed.
The following operations can be performed.
Item Description
Select All Clips Selects all clips.
Select OK
Marked
Selects all clips appended with
OK mark.
Select Range Specifies the range when
selecting multiple clips.
(A P89 [Selecting Multiple
Clips Randomly] )
Deselect All Clears all clip selections.
Add OK Mark Appends an OK mark.
0This Clip:
Appends an OK mark to the
clip pointed by the cursor.
0Selected Clips:
Appends an OK mark to the
clips selected (appended
with check mark).
0All Clips:
Appends an OK mark to all
clips.
Delete OK Mark Deletes the OK mark.
0This Clip:
Deletes the OK mark of the
clip pointed by the cursor.
0Selected Clips:
Deletes the OK mark of the
clips selected (appended
with check mark).
0All Clips:
Deletes the OK mark of all
clips.
Playing Recorded Clips 85
Playback
Item Description
FTP Upload Uploads a clip to the FTP server.
0This Clip:
Uploads the clip pointed by
the cursor.
0Selected Clips:
Uploads the clips selected
(appended with check
mark).
0All Clips:
Uploads all clips.
Delete Clips Deletes clip. However, clips with
OK mark cannot be deleted.
0This Clip:
Deletes the clip pointed by
the cursor.
0Selected Clips:
Deletes the clips selected
(appended with check
mark).
0All Clips:
Deletes all clips.
Trim This Clip Trims the clip pointed by the
cursor.
Memo :
0The object of action is the clip of the current slot
being displayed.
0[Selected Clips] cannot be performed if there are
no selected (appended with check mark) clips.
0[This Clip] cannot be performed if there are more
than one selected (appended with check mark)
clips.
0If the write-protect switch of an SD card is set,
OK mark cannot be appended or deleted, and
the clips cannot be deleted and trimmed.
Playing back
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel
of the camera recorder to play back.
.
A
C
B
ASet Button (R)
0Plays back/pauses the clip pointed by the
cursor.
0You can press the cross-shaped button (HI)
to perform frame-by-frame forward playback
during pause mode.
BCross-shaped Button (JKH I)
0[J/K] Button:
Skips in the reverse or forward direction.
0[H/I] Button:
0During Playback:
Fast forwards in the reverse or forward
direction.
0While paused:
Frame-by-frame playback in the reverse
or forward direction.
C[CANCEL/STOP] Cancel Button
Stops playback.
1In the thumbnail screen, move the cursor to
the clip to be played back.
Move the cursor to the clip to be played back
using the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
2Press the Set button (R).
Playback of the selected clip starts.
Audio Output during Playback
0You can confirm the playback sound from the
monitor speaker, or the headphone connected
to the [x] terminal. When a headphone is
connected to the [x] terminal, sound cannot be
output from the monitor speaker.
(A P139 [Connecting the Headphone] )
0Adjust the volume of the monitor speaker and
headphone using the J / K volume buttons on
the side of the camera recorder.
86 Playing Recorded Clips
Playback
Time Code Playback
Time code or user’s bit recorded on an SD card can
be displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Memo :
0The time code is also superimposed on the
video signal output from the [SDI OUT] terminal.
K
0If a section without time code is played back, the
time code will stop. However, playback will
continue.
Displaying Information during Shooting
Pressing the [DISPLAY] button during playback
displays the display screen.
Pressing the [OIS/6] button each time changes the
shooting information displayed (camera
information display and hide display).
0Camera information display displays only
information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White
Balance that have been recorded.
.
P 13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0dB
Camera Information Display
Memo :
0When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B System is set to “HD+Web”, only SD
or web files can be played back from slot B.
In this case, files up-converted into the HD size
are played back in the simple mode.
0Trimming information is displayed while
trimming is in progress. In this case, pressing the
[OIS/6] button does not switch the display.
Deleting Clips
Delete clip.
.
Memo :
0Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted on the camera recorder.
0Read-only clips can be deleted on a PC.
Deleting One Clip
Delete the clip (one clip) pointed by the cursor in
[Delete Clips] B [This Clip] in the menu.
Memo :
0Clips with OK mark cannot be deleted.
During Thumbnail Screen
1Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted.
Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted using
the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
.
218G0005
1
2015-01-07 07:08:43
2Press the [ZEBRA/5] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
Playing Recorded Clips 87
Playback
3Select [Delete Clips] B [This Clip] and press
the Set button (R).
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
.
3
All Clips
Selected Clips
This Clip
4Select [Delete] using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
Deleting starts.
.
4
Stop
Deleting...
Cancel
Delete
Delete This Clip?
Selecting and Deleting Multiple Clips
To select and delete multiple clips, refer to
“[Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple
Clips] (A P 89)”.
Deleting All Clips
Delete all clips that are displayed.
1Press the [ZEBRA/5] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
2Select [Delete Clips] B [All Clips].
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
3Select [Delete] and press the Set button
(R).
Deleting starts.
Memo :
0The time taken to delete clips depends on the
number of clips to be deleted.
Appending/Deleting OK
Mark
0You can append OK marks to the clips for
important scenes.
0Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted, thus protecting the important clips.
0When the camera recorder is in Media mode,
you can delete the OK marks appended during
recording, or append/delete OK marks after
shooting.
.
During Thumbnail Screen
1Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
0If the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK
mark will be appended.
0If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the
OK mark will be deleted.
.
OK Mark
88 Deleting Clips
Playback
During Playback or Pause Screen
1Press [LOLUX/3] button during clip
playback.
0If the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK
mark will be appended.
0If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the
OK mark will be deleted.
.
1000/2000
12:34:56
12:34:56
Jan 24,2015
Jan 24,2015
00:00:00.00
00:00:00.00
x5
x5
x5
x5
3840x2160
3840x2160
16.4V
16.4V
2/4
2/4
30p 150M
30p 150M
USER3
USER3
USER4
USER4
USER6
USER6
OK Mark
Memo :
0The clip pauses when an OK mark is appended
or deleted during playback.
Appending/Deleting OK Mark of
Multiple Clips
To select and append/delete OK mark for multiple
clips, refer to “[Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple Clips] (A P 89)”.
Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple
Clips
0Multiple clips can be selected during thumbnail
screen or playback screen display.
0After selecting multiple clips, perform
appending/deleting of OK mark, deleting of clips
using the action selection screen.
0After selecting multiple clips, the selections will
be canceled by the following operations.
0When [Deselect All] in the action menu is
selected
0When exiting Media mode from the thumbnail
screen
0When removing the SD card
0When switching the slot in use
Selecting Multiple Clips Randomly
1Move the cursor to a clip without a check
mark, and press the [C.REVIEW/4] button.
A green check mark appears on the clip.
.
1
2Repeat Step 1 to select multiple clips.
0Multiple clips can be selected.
0Press the [ZEBRA/5] button while the
multiple clips are selected.
0Appends OK mark together:
[Add OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]
0Deletes OK mark together:
[Delete OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]
0Uploading selected clips to the FTP server
together:
[FTP Upload] B [Selected Clips]
0Deletes selected clips together:
[Delete Clips] B [Selected Clips]
Memo :
0Selecting clips appended with check mark and
pressing the [C.REVIEW/4] button will cancel
the selection.
0If the operation is performed on multiple clips at
the same time, a progress bar appears. You can
stop the operation by pressing the Set button (R)
while the operation is in progress. However, it is
not possible to undo operations that are
completed.
Appending/Deleting OK Mark 89
Playback
Selecting Multiple Clips Consecutively
1Press the [ZEBRA/5] button.
2Select “Select Range” in the action
selection screen, and press the Set button
(R).
.
FTP Upload...
Delete OK Mark...
Add OK Mark...
Deselect All
Select Range
Select OK Marked
Select All Clips
2
3Move the cursor to the beginning (or end)
of the range for multiple selection, and
press the Set button (R).
4Move the cursor to the other end of the
range.
0Magenta check marks appear on the clips
within the range. (Including clips that were
already selected.)
0Gray check marks appear on selected clips
that are outside the range.
.
3
4
Selected Range:
Selected Range:
End Position
Start Position
5Press the Set button (R) to confirm the
range.
0The check marks change from magenta to
green.
0Pressing the [ZEBRA/5] button while the
multiple clips are selected displays the action
selection screen. The following operations
can be performed.
0Appends OK mark together:
[Add OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]
0Deletes OK mark together:
[Delete OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]
0Uploading selected clips to the FTP server
together:
[FTP Upload] B [Selected Clips]
0Deletes selected clips together:
[Delete Clips] B [Selected Clips]
Memo :
0Selecting clips appended with check mark and
pressing the [C.REVIEW/4] button will cancel
the selection.
0If the operation is performed on multiple clips at
the same time, a progress bar appears. You can
stop the operation by pressing the Set button (R)
while the operation is in progress. However, it is
not possible to undo operations that are
completed.
90 Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple Clips
Playback
Trimming Recorded Clips
You can extract (trim) the necessary parts of a clip
recorded in the SD card.
The trimmed clip is saved as a new file on the same
SD card as the original clip. No changes are made
to the original clip.
1Switch to Media mode.
Switch the mode using the [MODE] selection
button on the side control panel.
2Move the cursor to the clip to be trimmed.
Move the cursor to the clip to be trimmed using
the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
.
2
3Press the [ZEBRA/5] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
4Select [Trim This Clip], and press the Set
button (R).
Playback of the selected clip starts.
.
0 30min
11:22: 33.00
11:23: 44.00
00:08:22
282min
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00:00:00.00
3840x2160
30p 150M
4030 20 10 0
1000/ 2000
TRIM
OUT
IN
Trim This Clip
Delete Clips...
FTP Upload...
Delete OK Mark...
Add OK Mark...
Deselect All
Select Range
A
B
C
4
AGuide
Operation guide
BPosition bar
6:Current position of the video
7: Position to start trimming (in point)
8: Position to end trimming (out point)
CTrimming information
W or Y:Indicates the available space in
the storage media (W or Y)
7: Indicates the time code of the in
point
8: Indicates the time code of the out
point
9: Indicates the duration from the in
point to the out point
Memo :
0The trimmed clip will be saved to the same card
slot as that of the original clip.
0[Duration] appears in yellow in the following
durations. Trimming cannot be performed in this
case.
0When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is set
to “4K”: 3 minutes or longer; setting other
than “4K”: 10 minutes or longer.
0[Duration] appears in yellow if the duration is
longer than the recordable time on the storage
media. Trimming cannot be performed in this
case.
0When trimming starts, the display switches to
the Media Display 2 screen.
5Specify the in point.
0Operate buttons such as H/I or J/K to move
the video to the in point.
(A P86 [Playing back] )
0Specify the in point by pressing the [LOLUX/
3] button at the point you want to start
trimming.
6Specify the out point.
0Operate buttons such as H/I or J/K to move
the video to the out point.
(A P86 [Playing back] )
0Specify the out point by pressing the
[C.REVIEW/4] button at the point you want to
end trimming.
7Perform trimming.
Press the [ZEBRA/5] button to perform
trimming.
Memo :
0While trimming is in progress, you can press the
[CANCEL] button to return to the thumbnail
screen.
0While trimming is in progress, you can press the
[DISPLAY] button to switch the display, but the
trimming information is displayed at all times.
0When trimming the in and out point, the in point
trimmed may be up to one second before the
specified in point and the out point trimmed may
be up to one second behind the specified out
point.
Trimming Recorded Clips 91
Playback
Basic Operations in Menu
Screen
0Press the [MENU/THUMB] button on the LCD
monitor to display the menu screen on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder.
0Various settings for shooting and playback can
be configured on the menu screen.
0There are two types of menu screens - [Main
Menu] and [Favorites Menu].
0[Main Menu] contains all the setting items of the
camera recorder, classified according to
functions and uses, while [Favorites Menu]
allows users to customize the menu items freely.
(A P123 [Adding/Editing Frequently Used
Menu Items (Favorites Menu)] )
0The operating procedures and main screen
displays are the same for both menus.
0The menu screen can also be displayed on
external monitors connected to the video signal
output terminal.
(A P109 [ Display On TV ] )
Operation Buttons
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel
of the camera recorder or the buttons on the LCD
monitor to operate the menu.
.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A[MENU/THUMB] Button
0Displays the menu screen. The [Main
Menu] screen is displayed by default.
0During normal usage, [Main Menu] is
displayed if the previous menu operation
ended at [Main Menu], and [Favorites
Menu] if the previous menu operation ended
at [Favorites Menu].
0Press this button to close the menu screen
during menu display and return to the normal
screen.
0Pressing and holding down the button while
the menu is displayed switches the [Main
Menu] screen to the [Favorites Menu] or vice
versa.
BCross-shaped Button (JKH I)
J:Moves the cursor upward.
K: Moves the cursor downward.
H: Moves back to the previous item.
I: Moves forward to the next item.
CSet Button (R)
Sets the values and items.
D[CANCEL] Button
Cancels settings and returns to the previous
screen.
E[LOLUX/3] Button
Adds the selected menu or submenu item to the
[Favorites Menu].
(A P123 [Adding/Editing Frequently Used
Menu Items (Favorites Menu)] )
F[C.REVIEW/4] Button
Resets settings in the [TC Preset] or [UB
Preset] setting screen. This button is disabled
in other screens.
G[DISPLAY] Button
Switches between the [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] screens.
H[STATUS] Button
Displays a simple Help menu. Simple Help
appears only when the selected menu item
supports this function.
92 Basic Operations in Menu Screen
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Display and Description of the Menu
Screen
Selecting Menu Items
.
AddFavorites
SECShutter
24hourTime Style
YMDDate Style
OnDate/Time
TimeBattery
OffAudio Meter
Display Settings H
I
F
E
B
D
G
A
C
ACursor
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor
BMenu Item
0Displays the names of the menu item and
sub-menu.
0Menu items with [...] after them indicates that
there is a sub-menu to access.
CFixed Item
Items that cannot be changed are displayed in
gray and cannot be selected.
DOperation Guide
Guide for the current operation buttons.
ESetting Value
Setting values for the menu items.
For menus with sub-menus, values are not
displayed.
FScroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
GHeader
Indicates the current menu type with the line
color.
Blue : [Main Menu] Screen
Green : [Favorites Menu] (Operation
screen)
Magenta : [Favorites Menu] (Editing screen)
HRemaining Battery Power
(A P31 [Power Status Display] )
Memo :
0If the supplied battery (or equivalent battery sold
separately) is not used, the battery mark which
indicates the battery level may not appear.
IMenu Title
Title of the currently displayed menu.
Changing Setting Values
.
CancelSet
Off
SECShutter
24hourTime Style
YMDDate Style
Date/Time
Battery
Audio Meter
Display Settings
On
D
F
A
C
B
E
AMenu Item to Change
Menu item to be changed.
A list of setting values F appears in a pop-up.
BOperation Guide
Guide for the current operation buttons.
CSetting Values Before Change
Setting values before changing. The
background of the item is displayed in blue.
DScroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
ECursor
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor
FList of Setting Values
0A pop-up displaying a list of setting values for
selection.
0The height of the pop-up depends on the
number of settings available. Use the scroll
bar D to confirm the current display status.
Basic Operations in Menu Screen 93
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Text Input with Software Keyboard
Use the software keyboard to enter the [Setup
File] subname, [Clip Name Prefix], and the settings
under [Network] B [Settings].
Entering a subname
(A P136 [Configuring Setup Files] )
.
G
A
E
H
C
B
D
F
Entering the [Clip Name Prefix]
(A P118 [ Clip Name Prefix ] )
.
Cancel
Set
A
E
H
C
B
D
Settings under [Network] B [Settings]
The keyboard displayed varies according to the
settings.
(A P118 [Network/Settings Item K] )
.
A
H
CG
D
B
E
F
I
ACharacter Entry Field
0Field for entering the title.
0You can enter up to 8 characters for the
[Setup File] subname or up to 4 characters
for the [Clip Name Prefix].
BCharacter Cursor
Select a character using the key cursor D, and
press the Set button (R) to input the selected
character at the position of the character cursor.
The character cursor moves to the next position
on the right each time a character is input.
The cursor can be moved using the arrow keys
H.
CCharacter Keys
Use the cross-shaped button (JKHI) to move
the key cursor D to the character you want to
enter.
DKey Cursor
Indicates the currently selected character or
item. Use the cross-shaped button (JKHI) to
move the cursor.
EConfirmation Buttons
0Select [Set]/[Store] and press the Set button
(R) to confirm the title.
0Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R)
on the side control panel of the camera
recorder to abort character input and return
to the previous screen.
F[SP] Space Key
Select [SP] and press the Set button (R) on the
side control panel of the camera recorder to
enter a space at the current position of the
character cursor B.
G[3 ] Backspace Key
Select [3 ] and press the Set button (R) on the
side control panel of the camera recorder to
delete the character on the left of the character
cursor B.
HArrow Keys
Moves the position of the character cursor B.
ICharacter Switch Button
Switches the character buttons C to the upper
case, lower case, and symbols.
94 Basic Operations in Menu Screen
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Menu Screen Hierarchical
Chart
[Main Menu...] ....................................... (A P 95)
- [Camera Function...] .......................... (A P 96)
- [Bars] ............................................. (A P 96)
- [OIS] .............................................. (A P 96)
- [Flicker Correction] ........................ (A P 96)
- [Shutter] ......................................... (A P 96)
- [AE Speed] .................................... (A P 96)
- [AGC Limit] .................................... (A P 96)
- [Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)] ................. (A P 96)
- [Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)] ............... (A P 96)
- [EEI Limit] ...................................... (A P 96)
- [Smooth Trans] .............................. (A P 96)
- [FAW] ............................................ (A P 97)
- [GAIN L] ......................................... (A P 97)
- [GAIN M] ........................................ (A P 97)
- [GAIN H] ........................................ (A P 97)
- [Dynamic Zoom] ............................ (A P 97)
- [Handle Zoom Speed L] ................ (A P 97)
- [Handle Zoom Speed M] ............... (A P 97)
- [Handle Zoom Speed H] ................ (A P 97)
- [Zoom Ring] ................................... (A P 97)
- [Iris Dial] ........................................ (A P 97)
- [AF Speed] .................................... (A P 97)
- [AF Assist] ..................................... (A P 97)
- [User Switch Set...] ........................ (A P 97)
- [Camera Process...] ........................ (A P 100)
- [Detail] ......................................... (A P 100)
- [Adjust...] ............................... (A P 100)
- [Master Black] ............................. (A P 100)
- [Black Toe] .................................. (A P 100)
- [Knee] .......................................... (A P 100)
- [White Clip] .................................. (A P 101)
- [Gamma] ..................................... (A P 101)
- [WDR] .......................................... (A P 101)
- [White Balance...] ........................ (A P 101)
- [Color Matrix] ............................... (A P 102)
- [Color Gain] ................................. (A P 102)
- [Reset Process] ........................... (A P 102)
- [TC/UB...] ........................................ (A P 103)
- [TC Generator] ............................ (A P 103)
- [TC Preset] .................................. (A P 103)
- [UB Mode] ................................... (A P 103)
- [Drop Frame] ............................... (A P 104)
- [LCD/VF...] ...................................... (A P 104)
- [Shooting Assist...] ....................... (A P 104)
- [Marker Settings...] ...................... (A P 104)
- [Display Settings...] ...................... (A P 104)
- [VF SW] ....................................... (A P 104)
- [VF Color] .................................... (A P 104)
- [VF Bright] ................................... (A P 105)
- [VF Contrast] ............................... (A P 105)
- [LCD Bright] ................................. (A P 105)
- [LCD Contrast] ............................. (A P 105)
- [LCD Backlight] ........................... (A P 105)
- [LCD Mirror] ................................. (A P 105)
- [LCD/VF Peaking] ........................ (A P 105)
- [A/V Set...] ....................................... (A P 109)
- [Video Set...] ................................ (A P 109)
- [Audio Set...] ................................ (A P 109)
- [System...] ....................................... (A P 113)
- [Record Set...] ............................. (A P 113)
- [Media] ........................................ (A P 113)
- [Setup File] .................................. (A P 113)
- [Tally Lamp] ................................. (A P 113)
- [Language] .................................. (A P 113)
- [Network] K ............................. (A P 113)
- [Settings] ............................... (A P 114)
- [Reset All] .................................... (A P 114)
- [Date/Time] .................................. (A P 114)
- [Time Zone] ................................. (A P 114)
- [System Information] .................... (A P 114)
Memo :
0Some menus cannot be set depending on the operating mode or status of the camera recorder. These
items are displayed in gray, and they cannot be selected.
0Setting value with the R mark is the factory default.
Menu Screen Hierarchical Chart 95
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Camera Function Menu
Menu screen for specifying operation settings
during shooting.
This item can only be selected in the Camera
mode.
Bars
For setting whether to output color bars.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output
simultaneously with the color bar output.
(A P112 [ Test Tone ] )
OIS
For setting whether to enable image stabilizer.
When “On” is selected, set the Level.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
9Level
For setting the level of the image stabilizer.
[Setting Values: High, RNormal]
Memo :
0The icon changes according to the level set.
(A P128 [Image Stabilizer Mark] )
0When “High” is selected, correcting severe
camera shake may cause the area surrounding
the image to darken.
Flicker Correction
For setting whether to adjust image flicker that
occurs under a fluorescent light.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Shutter
For specifying shutter-related settings.
Set to “Step” (fixed value) or “Variable” when
operating with the J / K volume buttons on the side
of the camera recorder.
0Variable:
Sets to variable scan. Use this setting when
shooting a PC monitor.
0Step:
Sets to step shutter, which switches the shutter
speed by a fixed value.
[Setting Values: Variable, RStep]
AE Speed
For setting the convergence speed during AE (Auto
Exposure).
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]
AGC Limit
For setting the maximum gain value of “AGC”,
which electrically boosts the sensitivity level
according to the brightness automatically.
[Setting Values: 24dB, R18dB, 12dB, 6dB]
Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)
For setting the limit value of the OPEN end when
auto iris is enabled.
[Setting Values: F4, F2.8, RF2, F1.8, F1.6, F1.4,
F1.2]
Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)
For setting the limit value of the CLOSE end when
auto iris is enabled.
[Setting Values: F11, F8, RF5.6, F4]
EEI Limit
For setting the shutter speed control range when
the Automatic Shutter mode (EEI) is enabled.
[Setting Values: 4F-stop, R3F-stop, 2F-stop]
Smooth Trans
For setting the shock reduction function, which
slows down the sudden change when switching
with the [GAIN] or [WHT.BAL B/A/PRST] switch.
[Setting Values: ROff, Slow, Middle, Fast]
Memo :
0This function is disabled when AGC is operating.
96 Camera Function Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
FAW
For setting the position in the white balance switch
[WHT.BAL B/A/PRST] to assign the FAW (Full
Auto White Balance) function.
[Setting Values: RNone, PRST, A, B]
GAIN L/GAIN M/GAIN H
For setting the gain value of each position on the
[GAIN] selection switch.
The setting is fixed at “AGC” in the Full Auto mode.
In addition, the sensitivity setting in Lolux is used.
(A P98 [ Lolux ] )
[Setting Values: 24dB, 21dB, 18dB, 15dB, 12dB,
9dB, 6dB, 3dB, 0dB, AGC]
(Default values GAIN L: 0dB, GAIN M: 6dB, GAIN
H: 12dB)
Dynamic Zoom
For setting whether to enable the dynamic zoom
function.
0Off:
Enables only the optical zoom (1x to 12x).
0On:
Enables the dynamic zoom (12x to 24x) in
addition to the optical zoom.
[Setting Values: ROff, On]
Memo :
0When [System] is set to “4K”, this item is fixed at
“Off” and cannot be selected.
Handle Zoom Speed L/Handle Zoom Speed
M/Handle Zoom Speed H O
For setting the zoom speed for each position on the
[ZOOM L/M/H] zoom speed selection switch.
The larger the value the faster the zoom speed.
Selecting “Off” disables the zoom operation on the
handle.
[Setting Values: Off, 1 to 7]
(Default Values Handle Zoom Speed L: 1, Handle
Zoom Speed M: 4, Handle Zoom Speed H: 7)
Zoom Ring
For assigning the zoom or iris adjustment to the
zoom ring.
[Setting Values: RZoom, Iris]
Iris Dial
For assigning the iris, shutter or AE level
adjustment to the iris dial.
[Setting Values: RIris, Shutter, AE Level]
AF Speed
For setting the AF operation speed.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
AF Assist
For setting whether to shift the auto focus point
when the focus ring is turned during Auto Focus
(AF).
0Off:
Sets the AF Assist function to “Off”.
0Far/Near:
This option allows you to shift the auto focus
point to near and far directions by turning the
focus ring during AF.
0Area:
This option allows you to shift the auto focus
point to the left, center, right, or near and far
directions by turning the focus ring during AF.
Selecting this option displays the icon in
the area.
[Setting Values: ROff, Far/Near, Area]
(A P51 [AF Assist Function] )
Memo :
0This setting is effective only when the [FOCUS]
switch is set to “AUTO”.
0The manual focus adjustment mode is
temporarily activated by turning the focus ring in
the AF mode. If the focus ring is not operated for
a certain time, the camera recorder returns to the
AF mode.
User Switch Set...
For specifying user button related settings.
(A P98 [User Switch Set Item] )
Camera Function Menu 97
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
User Switch Set Item
USER1 ~ USER9, LCD KEY▲/LCD KEY▶/LCD
KEY▼/LCD KEY◀
By assigning one of the following functions to each
of the [F.ASSIST/1], [TC/2], [LOLUX/3],
[C.REVIEW/4], [ZEBRA/5], [OIS/6], [REC/7],
[EXPANDED FOCUS/8], [AWB/9] buttons or the
cross-shaped buttons on the LCD monitor, these
buttons can be used to control the assigned
function (on/off, start, switch).
Set according to the shooting conditions. Usable
only in the Camera mode.
[Setting Values: None, Zebra, Marker, Bars, Focus
Assist, OIS, LCD Backlight, Lolux, AE/FAW Lock,
Face Detect, OK Mark, Clip Cutter Trig, Backup
Trig, Clip Review, Load Picture File, White
Balance, TC Preset, AWB, Rec, Preset Zoom1,
Preset Zoom2, Preset Zoom3, Push AF/AF Lock,
One Push Iris, Expanded Focus, Live
Streaming K]
Memo :
0“Rec” can only be assigned to the [REC/7],
[EXPANDED FOCUS/8] and [AWB/9] buttons.
Lolux
To increase the sensitivity when in dim
surroundings, set a value in the Lolux mode.
[Setting Values: 36dB, R30dB]
Clip Review
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]-[USER9], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Clip
Review”.
0Last 5sec:
Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the
ending.
0Top 5sec:
Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the
beginning.
0Clip:
Views the entire clip.
[Setting Values: RLast 5sec, Top 5sec, Clip]
Face Detect
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]-[USER9], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Face
Detect”.
Select the control to track results of face detection.
0AF&AE:
Sets auto focus and exposure control for the
face that is being tracked.
0AF:
Sets auto focus for the face that is being tracked.
[Setting Values: RAF&AE, AF]
(A P53 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face
Detection] )
Memo :
0Face detection does not function when the “MF”
mode is enabled using the [AF/MF] selection
button.
0When “AF” is specified, this function will be
activated only when the “AF” mode is enabled
using the [AF/MF] selection button.
0When “AF&AE” is specified, this function will
operate when the “AF” mode is enabled using
the [AF/MF] selection button, and when one or
more of the items (Gain, Iris and Shutter) is set
to Auto mode.
9Sensitivity
For setting the level of ease of face detection.
[Setting Values: Low, Middle, RHigh]
9Hysteresis
For setting the margin to maintain status when the
face that is being tracked is lost.
Set to “Fast” to select another object immediately
if the face on the screen is lost.
Set to “Slow” to operate at the same position for
some time even if the face on the screen is lost.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
98 Camera Function Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
AE/FAW Lock
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]-[USER9], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to
“AE/FAW Lock”.
0FAW:
Fixes the FAW (Full-time Auto White Balance)
setting to the value at the point the user button
assigned with “AE/FAW Lock” is pressed.
0AE:
Use this feature to fix a value to the Auto function
of Gain, Iris, or Shutter when the user button that
is assigned “AE/FAW Lock” is pressed.
0AE/FAW:
Use this feature to fix the setting for the FAW
(Full-time Auto White Balance) and the Auto
function of Gain, Iris, or Shutter to the value at
the point the user button assigned with “AE/FAW
Lock” is pressed.
[Setting Values: FAW, RAE, AE/FAW]
Memo :
0This feature only works when Iris, Shutter, Gain
or White Balance is set to Auto mode.
0“AE/FAW Lock” is canceled when the user
button assigned with “AE/FAW Lock” is
pressed, or when any of the functions that can
be locked is operated regardless of the mode
(Manual or Auto).
Preset Zoom Speed
For setting the speed to shift to the preset zoom
position that is assigned to a user button.
[Setting Values: 1 to 21 (R 11)]
Expanded Focus
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]-[USER9], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to
“Expanded Focus”.
0Toggle:
Pressing the user button assigned with
“Expanded Focus” each time switches the
“Expanded Focus” function to on or off.
0Momentary:
The “Expanded Focus” function is enabled
during the interval while the user button
assigned with “Expanded Focus” is pressed.
0Limited Time:
Activates the timer.
During autofocus, the [Expanded Focus] feature
turns off about 3 seconds after it is turned on.
During manual focus, the [Expanded Focus]
feature turns off about 3 seconds after you stop
operating the focus ring.
[Setting Values: RToggle, Momentary, Limited
Time]
Camera Function Menu 99
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Camera Process Menu
Menu screen for adjusting the quality of camera
images.
This item cannot be selected in the Media mode.
Detail
For adjusting the contour (detail) enhancement
level.
Increasing the value increases the sharpness of
the contour.
[Setting Values: -10 to +10, Off (R0)]
9Adjust...
For specifying the detailed settings of the contour
(detail).
(A P102 [Detail/Adjust Item] )
Memo :
0This item cannot be selected when [Detail] is set
to “Off”.
Master Black
For adjusting the pedestal level (master black) that
serves as the reference black.
Increasing the value increases the pedestal.
[Setting Values: -50 to +50 (R0)]
Black Toe
Process the dark areas according to the balance of
bright and dark areas in the image to adjust the
overall balance of contrast.
For altering the gain of dark areas. Adjust this item
according to the condition of the captured video
signals.
0Stretch:
Increases the gain of dark areas in an image to
stretch the signals of these areas only, thereby
showing the contrast between bright and dark
areas more clearly.
Specify the amount of stretch with [Stretch
Level].
0Normal:
Normal condition.
0Compress:
Compresses the gain of dark areas to increase
the contrast when the entire image appears
bright and contrast is weak. Specify the
compression amount with [Compress Level].
[Setting Values: Stretch, RNormal, Compress]
Memo :
0When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
9Stretch Level
Stretch amount increases when a larger value is
specified.
[Setting Values: 1 to 5 (R 3)]
Memo :
0This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is
set to “Stretch”. Otherwise, this item appears as
“---” and cannot be selected.
9Compress Level
Compression amount increases when a larger
value is specified.
[Setting Values: 1 to 5 (R 3)]
Memo :
0This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is
set to “Compress”. Otherwise, this item appears
as “---” and cannot be selected.
Knee
For specifying the “Knee” operation, which
compresses video signals beyond a certain level to
show the gradation of the highlighted portion. To
check the gradation of a bright area, set to “Manual”
and adjust the knee point (starting point of knee
operation) manually.
0Manual:
Enables manual adjustment of knee point using
[Level].
0Auto:
Adjusts the knee point automatically according
to the luminance level.
[Setting Values: Manual, RAuto]
Memo :
0When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
9Level
For setting the starting point (knee point) of knee
compression when [Knee] is set to “Manual”.
[Setting Values: R100.0%,97.5%,95.0%,92.5%,
90.0%,87.5%,85.0%]
Memo :
0When [Knee] is set to other than “Auto”, or
[WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
100 Camera Process Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9Sensitivity
For setting the response speed of the “Knee”
operation when [Knee] is set to “Auto”.
Set to “Slow” when shooting an object under a
condition where there is drastic change in the light
intensity.
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]
Memo :
0When [Knee] is set to “Manual”, or [WDR] is set
to other than “Off”, this item appears as “---” and
cannot be selected.
White Clip
For setting the point to apply white clip for input
video signals with a high luminance level.
0108%:
Applies white clip at the point where the
luminance level is 108 %.
0103%:
Applies white clip at the point where the
luminance level is 103 %.
0100%:
Applies white clip at the point where the
luminance level is 100 %. Set to this value when
the system in use limits Y output signals within
100 %.
[Setting Values: R108%, 103%, 100%]
Memo :
0When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “108%” and cannot be selected.
Gamma
For adjusting the gamma curve that determines the
gradation expression.
0Cinema:
Sets to a gamma curve with similar gradation to
the screen characteristics of movies.
0Standard:
Sets to a standard gamma curve.
[Setting Values: Cinema, RStandard]
Memo :
0When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
9Gamma Level
This item can be specified separately when
[Gamma] is set to “Standard” or “Cinema”.
0Increase the number:
Enhances the gradation of black. However, the
gradation of bright areas deteriorates.
0Decrease the number:
Enhances the gradation of bright areas.
However, the gradation of black deteriorates.
[Setting Values: -5 to +5 (R 0)]
WDR
For setting the WDR (Wide Dynamic Range)
function.
When shooting object with wide dynamic range
due to backlight conditions, this function
compresses the dynamic range while maintaining
image contrast through providing gradation
compensation to the input video signals.
0Strong:
Enhances the effect of gradation compensation
for object with wide dynamic range due to
outdoor or strong backlight conditions.
0Natural:
Normal setting for wide dynamic range.
0Weak:
Reduces the effect of gradation compensation
compared to the normal setting.
0Off:
Sets the wide dynamic range function to “Off”.
[Setting Values: Strong, Natural, Weak, ROff]
Memo :
0When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, [Black
Toe], [Knee], [Gamma] and [White Clip] cannot
be selected.
White Balance...
Menu for adjusting white balance.
(A P102 [White Balance Item] )
* For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White
Balance] (A P 60)”.
Camera Process Menu 101
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Color Matrix
For setting the color matrix.
0Cinema Subdued:
Sets to a subdued color matrix that is similar to
the screen characteristics of movies.
0Cinema Vivid:
Sets to a vivid color matrix that is similar to the
screen characteristics of movies.
0Standard:
Sets to a standard color matrix.
[Setting Values: Cinema Subdued, Cinema Vivid,
RStandard]
Color Gain
For adjusting the video signal color level.
Increasing the value deepens the color.
[Setting Values: -50 to +15, Off (R0)]
Memo :
0Images are displayed in black-and-white when
this is set to “Off”.
Reset Process
Restores all items in the [Camera Process] menu
to their default settings.
Detail/Adjust Item
V/H Balance
For setting the H/V balance to enhance contour
(detail) in the horizontal (H) or vertical (V) direction.
0H+1 to H+4:
Increasing the value enhances contour in the
horizontal direction.
0V+1 to V+4:
Increasing the value enhances contour in the
vertical direction.
[Setting Values: H+1 to H+4, RNormal, V+1 to V+4]
Memo :
0When [System] under [Record Format] is set to
“SD”, this item is fixed at “Normal”.
0When [System] under [Record Format] is set to
“HD+Web”, this item can be set during HD
recording, but will be fixed at “Normal” during SD
recording.
White Balance Item
Preset Temp.
For setting the color temperature when the
[WHT.BAL B/A/PRST] switch is set to “PRST”.
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]
(A P 60)”.
Alternative Temp.
For setting the alternative color temperature in the
Preset mode.
When the [WHT.BAL B/A/PRST] switch is set to
“PRST”, pressing the [AWB/9] button each time
switches the color temperature setting in the Preset
mode. ([Preset Temp.]1[Alternative Temp.])
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]
(A P 60)”.
102 Camera Process Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
AWB Paint
For adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component in the
AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]
(A P 60)”.
0Increase the number:
Strengthens the red/blue.
0Decrease the number:
Weakens the red/blue.
[Setting Values: -32 to +32 (R 0)]
Memo :
0This item is selectable when the [WHT.BAL
B/A/PRST] switch on the right of the camera
recorder is set to “A” or “B”. When “PRST” is set,
this item appears as “---” and cannot be
selected.
0
Different values can be specified for “A” and “B”.
0When [Clear Paint After AWB] is set to “On”,
pressing the [AWB/9] button to readjust the
white balance switches the R and B values
automatically to “0”.
Clear Paint After AWB
For specifying whether to clear the [AWB Paint] (R
value and B value) settings after executing AWB
(Auto White Balance).
0On:
Sets the [AWB Paint] (R value and B value)
settings to “0” after executing AWB (Auto White
Balance).
0Off:
Does not change the [AWB Paint] (R value and
B value) settings after executing AWB (Auto
White Balance).
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
FAW Paint
For adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component
during FAW (Full Auto White Balance) mode.
0Increase the number:
Strengthens the red/blue.
0Decrease the number:
Weakens the red/blue.
[Setting Values: -32 to +32 (R 0)]
TC/UB Menu
Menu screen for setting time code and user’s bit.
This item cannot be selected in the Media mode,
or during recording.
TC Generator
For setting the operation of the time code.
0Free Run:
The time code operates in the run mode at all
times regardless of the recording status. It
continues to run even when the power of the
camera recorder is turned off.
0Rec Run:
The time code operates in the run mode during
recording. It continues to run in the order of the
recorded clips as long as the SD card is not
replaced. If the SD card is removed and
recording is made on another card, time code
will be recorded on the new card from where it
was left off in the previous card.
0Regen:
The time code operates in the run mode during
recording. When the SD card is replaced, the
last time code recorded on the card is read and
recorded on a new card so that the time code
continues in running order.
[Setting Values: Free Run, RRec Run, Regen]
TC Preset
For setting the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Display : Drop setting 02:02:25.20
: Non Drop setting 02:02:25:20
UB Mode
For setting the recording mode of the user’s bit.
0Date:
Records the date.
0Time:
Records the time.
0Preset:
Records according to the preset setting.
(A P71 [Setting the User’s Bit] )
[Setting Values: Date, Time, RPreset]
Memo :
0If UB Mode is set to “Time”, the user’s bit
operates in the 24-hour format even if the LCD
display is in the 12-hour format.
Camera Process Menu 103
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9Preset
For setting the user’s bit. (Digit by digit)
Display : AB CD EF 01
(A P71 [Presetting the User’s Bit] )
Memo :
0When [UB Mode] is set to “Date” or “Time”, this
item appears as “---” and preset is disabled.
Drop Frame
For setting the framing mode of the time code
generator.
0Non Drop:
Internal time code generator works in the non-
drop-frame mode. Use this setting when placing
emphasis on the number of frames.
0Drop:
Internal time code generator works in the drop-
frame mode. Use this setting when placing
emphasis on the recording time.
[Setting Values: Non Drop, RDrop]
Memo :
0This item can be set only when [Main Menu] B
[System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B
[WFrame Rate] is set to “60p”, “30p”, or “60i”.
When [Frame Rate] is “24p”, “Non Drop”
becomes fixed and cannot be selected. When
[Frame Rate] is “50p”, “25p”, or “50i”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
(A P115 [ W Frame Rate ] )
LCD/VF Menu
Item for specifying settings related to the LCD
monitor or viewfinder screen.
This menu screen can be used to specify settings
related to the Focus Assist mode, zebra pattern
display, screen size, marker, and safety zone. In
addition, it is also used for selecting whether to
display characters on the LCD monitor or
viewfinder screen, as well as for adjusting the
picture quality of the LCD monitor.
Shooting Assist...
Menu for setting the Shooting Assist function.
(A P105 [Shooting Assist Item] )
Marker Settings...
For setting items such as the safety zone and
center mark.
(A P106 [Marker Settings Item] )
Display Settings...
For specifying display-related settings.
(A P107 [Display Settings Item] )
VF SW
For setting whether to assign the operation for
pulling out or retracting the viewfinder to the switch.
0Disable:
A viewfinder image is displayed regardless of
the state of the viewfinder.
0Enable:
Displays a viewfinder image only when the
viewfinder is pulled out.
[Setting Values: Disable, REnable]
Memo :
0Displays a viewfinder image regardless of the
setting when an image is not displayed on the
LCD monitor.
(A P37 [Displays on the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder Screen (VF)] )
VF Color
For selecting whether to display the image on the
viewfinder screen in color or black-and-white.
Select “On” to display in color, and “Off” to display
in black-and-white.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
104 TC/UB Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
VF Bright
For setting the brightness of the viewfinder screen.
Increasing the value increases the brightness.
[Setting Values: -10 to +10 (R 0)]
VF Contrast
For setting the difference in luminance between the
darkest and brightness areas in the viewfinder
screen.
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: -10 to +10 (R 0)]
LCD Bright
For setting the brightness of the LCD screen.
Increasing the value increases the brightness.
[Setting Values: -10 to +10 (R 0)]
LCD Contrast
For setting the difference in luminance between the
darkest and brightness areas in the LCD monitor.
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: -10 to +10 (R 0)]
LCD Backlight
For setting the brightness of the LCD monitor
backlight.
[Setting Values: Bright, RNormal]
LCD Mirror
For specifying the image display method when
facing the LCD monitor.
Select “Mirror” to display the image after laterally
inverting it. (Mirror display)
(A P37 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
[Setting Values: Mirror, RNormal]
Memo :
0The setting of this item is valid only in Camera
mode.
0During color bar, expanded focus, menu screen
and status screen display, the “Mirror” setting is
disabled.
(A P135 [Color Bar Output] )
LCD/VF Peaking
For adjusting the contour of the image displayed on
the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
[Setting Values: -10 to +10 (R 0)]
Shooting Assist Item
Focus Assist
For setting whether to add color to the contour of
the focused image upon switching the image to
black-and-white.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9Type
For specifying the operation when the
[F.ASSIST/1] button is pressed.
(A P52 [Focus Assist Function] )
0ACCU-Focus:
Enables the Focus Assist and ACCU-Focus
(forced focus) functions. The depth of field of the
object becomes shallower to enable easier
focusing. The ACCU-Focus function switches
automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.
0Normal:
Enables only the Focus Assist function. The
focused area is displayed in color to enable
easier focusing. Display color can be specified
with [Color].
[Setting Values: ACCU-Focus, RNormal]
9Color
For setting the display color of the focused area
when Focus Assist is activated.
[Setting Values: RBlue, Green, Red]
Zebra
For selecting whether to display zebra patterns at
the bright areas of the subject.
Select “On” to display zebra patterns or “Off” to
hide.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9Top
For setting the maximum luminance level for the
zebra pattern display.
[Setting Values: Over, 100% to 5% (in 5%
increments)] (R80%)
9Bottom
For setting the minimum luminance level for the
zebra pattern display.
[Setting Values: 100% to 0% (in 5% increments)]
(R70%)
Memo :
0The relation between Top and Bottom is such
that Top>Bottom always holds. To maintain this
relation during setting, the setting value is
automatically corrected.
LCD/VF Menu 105
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Marker Settings Item
For setting the marker and safety zone, which are
useful in helping you determine the angle of view
for the image according to the shooting purpose.
(A P135 [Marker and Safety Zone Displays
(Camera Mode Only)] )
Memo :
0During Clip Review or when in the Media mode,
the markers do not appear regardless of the
setting.
Marker
For setting whether to display marker, safety zone,
and center marks on the screen.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9Grid Marker
For setting whether to display a 3x3 grid on the
screen.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0When [Grid Marker] is set to “On”, [Aspect
Ratio], [Aspect Marker], and [Safety Zone] do
not function.
9Aspect Ratio
For selecting the final image aspect ratio to be used
from the overall angle of view.
[Setting Values: 16:9(+4:3), 2.35:1 Top, 2.35:1
Center, 1.85:1 Top, 1.85:1 Center, R16:9, 1.75:1,
1.66:1, 14:9, 13:9, 4:3]
Memo :
0When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item
is fixed at “4:3” and cannot be selected.
(A P116 [ SD Aspect ] )
9Aspect Marker
For specifying how boundary markers are to be
used to indicate the parts of an image that are
beyond the range of the aspect ratio selected in
[Aspect Ratio].
0Line+Halftone:
Displays the boundary using lines, and areas
outside the boundary in halftone.
0Halftone:
Displays areas outside the boundary in halftone.
0Line:
Displays the boundary using lines.
0Off:
Hides the boundary markers.
[Setting Values: Line+Halftone, Halftone, Line,
ROff]
Memo :
0When [Aspect Ratio] is set to “16:9” or
“16:9(+4:3)”, this item is fixed at “Off” and cannot
be selected.
9Safety Zone
For setting the percentage of area that is to be
deemed as valid area (Safety Zone) within the
boundary of the aspect ratio selected in [Aspect
Ratio].
[Setting Values: 95%, 93%, 90%, 88%, 80%, ROff]
9Center Mark
For specifying whether to display a mark to indicate
the screen center within the aspect ratio selected
in [Aspect Ratio].
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
106 LCD/VF Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Display Settings Item
This menu is used to set the displays on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen.
Zoom
For setting the display method of the zoom
position.
0Number:
Displays the zoom position in numbers (0-99).
0Bar:
Displays the zoom position in a bar.
0Off:
Does not display the zoom position.
[Setting Values: Number, RBar, Off]
Focus
For setting the display method of the focal length
during manual focus.
0Feet:
Displays the focal length in feet.
0Meter:
Displays the focal length in meters.
0Off:
Hides the focal length.
[Setting Values: Feet, RMeter, Off]
WB Indicator
When “On” is selected and WB is set manually, the
difference in value with the Auto WB
(recommended) is displayed as an icon on the
screen.
(Example) When 3200K is selected
<●3200K>
.............. Color temperature setting is appropriate
<▲3200K> .... Color temperature setting is higher
<▼3200K> ..... Color temperature setting is lower
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
ND Filter
For setting whether to display the filter position.
0Off:
Hides the filter position.
0On:
Displays the current filter position.
0On+Assist:
Displays the current filter position.
If the ND filter setting is inappropriate, the
appropriate ND filter to select will appear
blinking.
[Setting Values: Off, ROn, On+Assist]
Record Format
For setting whether to display the video format
during recording or playback.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Media Remain
For setting whether to display the remaining space
of the recording SD card.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo :
0When the remaining space warning is
displayed, the information appears even when
“Off” is selected.
0The displayed time is an estimate.
TC/UB
For specifying whether to display the time code
(TC) or user’s bit (UB) rate in the display on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen.
[Setting Values: UB, RTC, Off]
Audio Meter
For specifying whether to display the audio level
meter on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Battery
For setting the display of the remaining battery
power in the display on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen.
The battery information appears only on the
Display 1 screen in Camera mode.
(A P127 [Display 1 screen] )
0Time:
Displays the remaining battery power in
minutes. (min)
0Capacity%:
Displays the remaining battery power in
percentage. (%)
0Voltage:
Displays the current battery voltage in units of
0.1 V. (V)
0Off:
The remaining battery power is not displayed.
[Setting Values: RTime, Capacity%, Voltage, Off]
LCD/VF Menu 107
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Memo :
0
The battery mark that appears before the “Time”,
“Capacity%” or “Voltage” value changes
according to the remaining battery power.
In addition, the plug mark is added during
charging.
4 S: 10 % and below
D R: 11 % to 30 %
C Q: 31% to 70 %
B P: 71 % to 100 %
0When the remaining battery power is low, “RES”
instead of the value is displayed.
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
0The remaining battery power and remaining
time are intended as reference values for the
shooting duration.
0The time, capacity or voltage will not be
displayed during charging.
Date/Time
For specifying whether to display the date and time
in the display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screen.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Date Style
For setting the date display sequence for display
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen as well
as for time stamp recording.
Display examples of the setting values are as
follows.
0DMY2: 30 Jun 2012
0DMY1: 30-06-2012
0MDY2: Jun 30, 2012
0MDY1: 06-30-2012
0YMD: 2012-06-30
[Setting Values: DMY2, DMY1, MDY1, MDY2,
YMD]
(Default values: MDY2 (U model), DMY1 (E
model))
Time Style
For setting the time display for display on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen as well as for time
stamp recording.
[Setting Values: 24hour, 12hour]
(Default values: 12hour (U model), 24hour (E
model))
Shutter
For setting the shutter display to be displayed on
the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
0DEG:
Displays the shutter speed in degrees in the
same way as film cameras.
0SEC:
Displays the shutter speed in seconds.
[Setting Values: DEG, RSEC]
Memo :
0“DEG” is selectable only when [WFrame Rate]
is set to “24p” or “25p”.
When [WFrame Rate] is set to other values, the
shutter display setting is fixed at “SEC” and
cannot be selected.
(A P115 [ W Frame Rate ] )
108 LCD/VF Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
A/V Set Menu
Menu screen for video output and audio.
Video Set...
For specifying video output-related settings.
(A P109 [Video Set Item] )
Audio Set...
For specifying audio-related settings.
(A P110 [Audio Set Item] )
Video Set Item
Display On TV
For setting whether to display the display and menu
characters on the external monitor.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
HDMI/SDI Out K
For setting the terminal to output the video.
[Setting Values: HDMI+SDI, SDI, HDMI, ROff]
9Resolution K
For selecting the resolution of video output from the
[HDMI] terminal or [SDI OUT] terminal according to
the monitor to be connected.
[Setting Values: 576i, 576p, 480i, 480p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 2160/24p, 2160/25p, 2160/30p]
Memo :
0The selectable options vary according to the
setting in [System]/[WResolution] and [WFrame
Rate] of [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format].
0Cross conversion output is not possible.
0This item cannot be specified when HDMI/SDI
Out is set to “Off”.
9HDMI Color K
0For setting the color format of HDMI signals.
0This item is selectable when [HDMI/SDI Out] is
set to “HDMI” or “HDMI+SDI”.
[Setting Values: RGB, RAuto]
9HDMI Enhance K
0For setting the color range of HDMI signals.
When connecting to a PC monitor, set this to
“On”.
0This item is selectable when [HDMI/SDI Out] is
set to “HDMI” or “HDMI+SDI”.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9SDI Rec Trigger K
For setting whether to superimpose trigger signals
in tandem with the [SDI OUT] terminal as well as
the [REC] button on the camera body.
If “On” is specified, it is possible to record on a
device equipped with SDI record trigger in tandem
with the operation of the [REC] button.
When a compatible device is connected,
recording/stop control signals are output in tandem
with the operation of the [REC] button.
The SDI record trigger output status to the
connected device is indicated by REC B/STBY B
on the display screen.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0Even if REC B/STBYB is displayed on the
display screen, the compatible device may not
necessarily be recording.
HDMI Out M
For setting whether to output the HDMI signal.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9Resolution M
For selecting the resolution of video output from the
[HDMI] terminal according to the monitor to be
connected.
[Setting Values: 576i, 576p, 480i, 480p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 2160/24p, 2160/25p, 2160/30p]
Memo :
0The selectable options vary according to the
setting in [System]/[WResolution] and [WFrame
Rate] of [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format].
0Cross conversion output is not possible.
9HDMI Color M
0For setting the color format of HDMI signals.
0This item is selectable when [HDMI Out] is set
to “On”.
[Setting Values: RGB, RAuto]
9HDMI Enhance M
0For setting the color range of HDMI signals.
When connecting to a PC monitor, set this to
“On”.
0This item is selectable when [HDMI Out] is set
to “On”.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
A/V Set Menu 109
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
SD Aspect
For setting the style of displaying images with a
16:9 aspect ratio on a 4:3 aspect ratio screen.
0Letter:
Displays as a wide image with the top and
bottom blackened.
0Squeeze:
Displays image that is squeezed horizontally.
[Setting Values: Letter, RSqueeze]
Memo :
0When [Record Format] B [System] is set to
“SD”, and [Record Format] B [SD Aspect] is set
to “4:3”, “---” is displayed and selection is
disabled.
(A P115 [ System ] )
SD Set Up
For selecting whether to add a setup signal to the
video signal output from the [AV] output terminal.
Setup signals are added when “7.5%” is selected.
[Setting Values: 7.5%, 0.0%]
(Default values: 7.5% (U model), fixed at “0.0%” (E
model))
Memo :
0Depending on the menu settings of the camera
recorder and the condition of the cable
connected to it, the setup signal setting may be
fixed at “0.0%”. “0.0%” is displayed in gray in this
case.
Audio Set Item
CH1 INT
For selecting either the built-in microphone or the
[AUX] terminal as the CH1 audio input signal.
This item is selectable if the [CH1] audio input
signal selection switch is set to “INT” O, and a
microphone is connected to the [AUX] terminal.
0AUX L:
Sets the [AUX] terminal as the CH1 audio input
signal.
0Int. Mic L:
Sets the left channel (Lch) of the built-in
microphone as the CH1 audio input signal.
[Setting Values: RAUX L, Int. Mic L]
Memo :
0If the [AUX] terminal is not connected, this item
is fixed at “Int. Mic L”.
0When the [CH1] audio input signal selection
switch is set to a value other than “INT”, “---” is
displayed and selection is disabled.
0If the handle unit is not connected, the state of
the [CH1] audio input signal selection switch is
equivalent to “INT”.
CH2 INT
For selecting either the built-in microphone or the
[AUX] terminal as the CH2 audio input signal.
This item is selectable if the [CH2] audio input
signal selection switch is set to “INT” O, and a
microphone is connected to the [AUX] terminal.
0AUX R:
Sets the [AUX] terminal as the CH2 audio input
signal.
0Int. Mic R:
Sets the right channel (Rch) of the built-in
microphone as the CH2 audio input signal.
[Setting Values: RAUX R, Int. Mic R]
Memo :
0If the [AUX] terminal is not connected, this item
is fixed at “Int. Mic R”.
0When the [CH2] audio input signal selection
switch is set to a value other than “INT”, “---” is
displayed and selection is disabled.
0If the handle unit is not connected, the state of
the [CH2] audio input signal selection switch is
equivalent to “INT”.
Input1 Mic Ref./Input2 Mic Ref. O
For setting the reference input level when the
[INPUT1]/[INPUT2] selection switch is set to “MIC”
or “MIC+48V”.
[Setting Values: -62dB, -56dB, R-50dB, -44dB,
-38dB, -32dB]
Memo :
0This item is not displayed if the handle unit is not
connected.
Ref. Level
For setting the recording reference level. (Applies
to both [CH1/CH2].)
[Setting Values: -12dB, -18dB, R-20dB]
110 A/V Set Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
XLR Manual Level O
For setting whether to link manual audio
adjustment operation between [INPUT1] and
[INPUT2] terminals.
Select “Link” to link or “Separate” to separate.
When this item is set to “Link”, adjust the recording
level using the [CH1] recording level adjustment
knob.
[Setting Values: Link, RSeparate]
Memo :
0This item is not displayed if the handle unit is not
connected.
0Enabled only when both the [INPUT1/INPUT2]
input terminals are set to “LINE” or “MIC”, and
both [CH1]/[CH2] of the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switches are set to
“MANUAL”.
0If any of the [INPUT1/INPUT2] input terminals is
set to “INT”, and [LEVEL MODE] is set to
“AUTO”, this item is fixed at “Separate”.
0When this item is set to “Link”, [CH2] recording
level adjustment knob is disabled.
Audio Level
Select this item to switch to the audio level
adjustment screen.
(A P67 [Setting the Audio recording Level in the
Main Menu] )
* The contents displayed on the screen vary
depending on the various settings.
Memo :
0This item is not displayed if the handle unit is
connected.
0When [Audio On FULL AUTO] is set to “Auto”,
this item cannot be selected when Full Auto is
enabled using the [FULL AUTO] button.
0If both CH1 and CH2 are set to the built-in
microphone or to AUX, settings for CH2 will not
be displayed, and the settings for CH1 will apply
to CH2.
Limiter Mode
For setting whether to link the limiter operation of
[CH1] and [CH2].
Select “Link” to link or “Separate” to separate.
[Setting Values: Link, RSeparate]
Memo :
0You can select either “Link” or “Separate” only
when the [CH1/CH2] audio input signal
selection switch is set to “INPUT1”/“INPUT2”
respectively and both the [INPUT1/INPUT2]
input signal selection switches are set to the
same setting and both the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switches are set to “AUTO”.
0This item is fixed at “Link” when [CH1 INT] and
[CH2 INT] have the following combinations.
0“AUX L” and “AUX R”
0“Int. Mic L” and “Int. Mic R”
0In all other cases, it is fixed at “Separate”.
9CH1 Limiter/CH2 Limiter
For specifying the limiter settings for the CH1/CH2
audio input.
oThreshold Level
For setting the value for activating the limiter.
[Setting Values: Off, R-6dBFS, -9dBFS]
oAttack Time
For setting the response speed for activating the
limiter.
[Setting Values: Slow, RMiddle, Fast]
oDecay Time
For setting the attenuation rate after the limiter
is activated.
[Setting Values: Slow, RMiddle, Fast]
Memo :
0When [Limiter Mode] is set to “Link”, [CH2
Limiter] cannot be specified.
0If the channel specified is set to “AUTO”,
[Threshold Level] cannot be set to “Off”.
INPUT1 Mic Wind Cut/INPUT2 Mic Wind Cut
O
For selecting whether to cut the low frequencies of
the audio input signals (low-cut) when the
[INPUT1]/[INPUT2] selection switch is set to “MIC”
or “MIC+48V”.
Set this item to reduce wind noise from the
microphone.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0This item is not displayed if the handle unit is not
connected.
A/V Set Menu 111
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Int. Mic Wind Cut
For selecting whether to cut the low frequencies of
the audio input signals (low-cut) from the built-in
microphone. Set this item to “On” to reduce wind
noise from the microphone.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0This item is enabled in the following cases.
0When the [CH1] or [CH2] selection switch is
set to “INT”. O
0[CH1 INT] is set to “Int. Mic L” or [CH2 INT] is
set to “Int. Mic R”.
(A P110 [ CH1 INT ] )
(A P110 [ CH2 INT ] )
Int. Mic Stereo Enhancer
For setting the enhancement level of the stereo
effect of the built-in microphone.
0On:
Enhances the stereo effect.
0Off:
Does not enhance the stereo effect.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0This item is enabled in the following cases.
0Both [CH1] and [CH2] selection switches are
set to “INT”. O
0[CH1 INT] is set to “Int. Mic L” and [CH2
INT] is set to “Int. Mic R”.
(A P110 [ CH1 INT ] )
(A P110 [ CH2 INT ] )
Monitor
For setting the audio output from the [x] jack or the
speaker.
0CH1:
Outputs only the audio input from [CH1].
0CH2:
Outputs only the audio input from [CH2].
0Mix:
Generates a mixed audio output from [CH1] and
[CH2].
0Stereo:
Outputs audio from [CH1] to L and audio from
[CH2] to R.
[Setting Values: CH1, CH2, Mix, RStereo]
Memo :
0If both [CH1] and [CH2] are input signals of the
built-in microphone, “Mix” cannot be selected for
the output from the [x] jack.
0“Stereo” cannot be selected for speaker output.
Alarm Level
For selecting whether to turn on the warning tone
as well as setting the volume.
The warning tone is output from the monitor
speaker or [x] terminal.
[Setting Values: High, Low, ROff]
Test Tone
For specifying whether to output the audio test
signals (1 kHz) during color bar output.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Audio On FULL AUTO
For setting whether to enable Auto for audio when
Full Auto is enabled using the [FULL AUTO] button.
0SW Set:
The audio recording mode follows the settings
below.
0When the handle unit is connected: Follows
the [CH1 AUTO/MANUAL]/[CH2 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switch setting.
0When the handle unit is not connected:
Follows the MENU setting (AUTO/MANUAL
in the audio level setting).
0Auto:
Sets audio recording mode to the forced auto
mode.
[Setting Values: SW Set, RAuto]
112 A/V Set Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
System Menu
This menu screen allows system-related settings.
For specifying recording settings, formatting and
restoring of SD card, tally lamp settings, network
settings, date/time, time zone, and other settings.
It can also be used to reset the menu settings to
their default values.
Record Set...
For specifying recorded video-related settings.
(A P114 [Record Set Item] )
Media
9Format Media
For formatting (initializing) an SD card.
Select a card slot (A or B), select [Format] from
[Cancel]/[Format], and press the Set button (R) to
format (initialize) the card.
(A P42 [Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards] )
9Restore Media
For restoring an SD card.
Select a card slot (A or B), and press the Set button
(R) to restore the SD card.
(A P43 [Restoring the SD Card] )
Memo :
0This item appears only when the SD card needs
to be restored. However, it is not selectable
when recording in Camera mode and during Clip
Review.
Setup File
This allows you to save the menu settings as well
as the performance results of shutter speed and
AWB.
It is useful to save settings according to different
shooting conditions.
9Load File...
Loads the settings.
(A P137 [Loading a Setup File] )
9Store File...
Saves the settings.
(A P136 [Saving Setup Files] )
Tally Lamp
For setting whether to light up the tally lamp during
recording, when the remaining space warning is
displayed, or during live streaming.
Memo :
0The blinking warning display, such as when the
remaining battery level is low, is enabled in a
setting other than “Off”.
oK
0Off:
Turns off the indicator.
0Rec:
Lights up during recording.
0Live Streaming:
Lights up during live streaming. Does not light
up during recording.
0Rec/Live Streaming:
Lights up during recording or live streaming.
[Setting Values: Off, RRec, Live Streaming, Rec/
Live Streaming]
oM
0Off:
Turns off the indicator.
0On:
Lights up during recording.
[Setting Values: Off, ROn]
Language
Switches between languages in the menu screen.
[Setting Values: REnglish, Français, Español] (U
model)
[Setting Values: REnglish, Français, Deutsch,
Italiano, Español, Pусский, Türkçe] (E model)
Network K
When using the network feature, set to “On”.
0On:
Uses the network function.
0Off:
Does not use the network function.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
System Menu 113
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9Import Metadata
0For importing metadata from the FTP server.
K
0Deletes the metadata loaded using the setup
files (“User File”/“All File”).
Memo :
0This option is not available when [Network] is set
to “Off”.
9Settings...
For specifying network-related settings.
(A P118 [Network/Settings Item K] )
Memo :
0This option is not available when [Network] is set
to “Off”.
Reset All
Resets all menu settings.
Memo :
0[Date/Time] and [Time Zone] cannot be reset.
(A P114 [ Date/Time ] )
(A P114 [ Time Zone ] )
0This item is not selectable when recording in
Camera mode, during Clip Review, during live
streaming K and in Media mode.
Date/Time
For setting the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
Memo :
0The display order of the date (year, month, day)
follows the setting in [Display Settings] B [Date
Style]. However, the 24-hour format is used for
the hour display regardless of the [Time Style]
setting.
(A P108 [ Date Style ] )
Time Zone
For setting the UTC time difference in units of 30
minutes.
[Setting Values: UTC-00:30-UTC-12:00, UTC,
UTC+14:00-UTC+00:30 (in 30 min increments)]
(Default values: UTC-05:00 (U model), UTC (E
model))
Memo :
0If [Date/Time] is already set, the [Date/Time]
item is automatically adjusted when [Time
Zone] is altered.
System Information
9Version
Displays information on the firmware version.
Display example : 0000-0000
9Fan Hour
For displaying the usage time of the internal fan.
Memo :
0Under normal environment, dust will
accumulate on the internal fan when the camera
recorder is used over a long period. Dust may
enter the camera recorder especially if it is used
outdoors. This may affect the image and sound
quality of the camera recorder. Check and
replace the fan after every 9000 hours
(suggested guideline).
9Open Source License
Displays the license for the open source software
used by this camera recorder.
Record Set Item
Record Format
After setting of all items in the [Record Format]
menu is complete, select [Set] at the bottom of the
screen to apply the new settings on the camera
recorder and switch the recording format. A
“Please Wait...” message appears during
switching.
114 System Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9System
For selecting a system definition.
04K:
Records in “4K” quality for both slots A and B.
0HD:
Records in “HD” (High Definition) quality for both
slots A and B.
0SD:
Records in “SD” (Standard Definition) quality for
both slots A and B.
0HD+Web:
Records in “HD” (high definition) for slot A, and
in resolution suitable for web distribution for slot
B.
[Setting Values: 4K, RHD, SD, HD+Web]
Caution :
0The selectable options for the [WFormat],
[WResolution], [WFrame Rate], and [WBit Rate]
settings vary depending on the setting of this
item.
9W Format
For selecting the format of the file to be recorded to
the SD card in slot A.
0QuickTime:
QuickTime file format (.MOV)
0AVCHD:
AVCHD file format
[Setting Values: RQuickTime, AVCHD]
Memo :
0When [System] is set to “4K”, this item is fixed at
“QuickTime”.
9W Resolution
For selecting the image size to be recorded to the
SD card in slot A. (Horizontal x vertical)
The available options vary according to the
[System] and [WFormat] settings.
0When [System] is set to “4K”:
Fixed at “3840x2160”.
0When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”, and
[WFormat] is set to “QuickTime”:
[Setting Values: R1920x1080, 1280x720]
0When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”, and
[WFormat] is set to “AVCHD”:
Fixed at “1920x1080”.
0When [System] is set to “SD”:
Fixed at either “720x480” or “720x576”.
Memo :
0The selectable values of [WFrame Rate] and
[WBit Rate] vary according to the setting of this
item.
9W Frame Rate
For selecting the frame rate to be recorded to the
SD card in slot A.
The available options vary according to the settings
for [System], [WResolution], and [WFormat].
0When [System] is set to “4K”:
[Setting Values: 30p, 25p, 24p]
0When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”:
0When [WResolution] is set to “1920x1080”
([WFormat] is set to “AVCHD”):
[Setting Values: 60p, 60i, 50p, 50i]
0When [WResolution] is set to “1920x1080”
([WFormat] is set to “QuickTime”):
[Setting Values: 60p, 60i, 50p, 50i, 30p, 25p,
24p]
0When [WResolution] is set to “1280x720”:
[Setting Values: 60p, 50p]
0When [System] is set to “SD”:
Fixed at either “60i” or “50i”.
9W Bit Rate
For selecting the bit rate to be recorded to the SD
card in slot A.
The available options vary according to the settings
for [System], [WResolution], and [WFormat].
0When [System] is set to “4K”:
Fixed at “150M”.
0When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”, and
[WFormat] is set to “QuickTime”:
[Setting Values: 50M(YUV422), 50M(XHQ),
35M(UHQ)]
0When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”, and
[WFormat] is set to “AVCHD”:
[Setting Values: 28M(HQ), 24M(HQ), 18M(SP)]
* [WResolution] is fixed at “1920x1080”.
0When [System] is set to “SD”:
Fixed at “8M”.
9Y Format
For selecting the file format to be recorded to the
SD card in slot B when [System] is set to “HD
+Web”.
0QuickTime:
QuickTime file format (.MOV)
0AVCHD:
AVCHD file format
[Setting Values: RQuickTime, AVCHD]
System Menu 115
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9Y Resolution
For selecting the size of the image to be recorded
to the SD card in slot B when [System] is set to “HD
+Web”. (Horizontal x vertical)
The available options vary according to the
[WFrame Rate] and [YFormat] settings.
0When [YFormat] is set to “QuickTime”:
[Setting Values: 960x540, 720x576, 720x480,
480x270]
0When [YFormat] is set to “AVCHD”:
[Setting Values: 1440x1080, 720x576,
720x480]
Memo :
0When [System] is set to “4K”, “HD”, or “SD”, this
item is fixed at the same setting as
[WResolution].
9Y Frame Rate
The frame rate of the image to be recorded to the
SD card in slot B is fixed when [System] is set to
“HD+Web”.
The value fixed varies according to the settings for
[YFormat], [YResolution], and [WFrame Rate].
0When [YFormat] is set to “AVCHD”:
Fixed at either “60i” or “50i”.
0When [YFormat] is set to “QuickTime”:
Fixed at “60i”, “50i”, “30p” or “25p”.
Memo :
0When [System] is set to “4K”, “HD”, or “SD”, this
item is fixed at the same setting as [WFrame
Rate].
9Y Bit Rate
For selecting the bit rate of the image to be
recorded to the SD card in slot B when [System] is
set to “HD+Web”.
The available options vary according to the
[YFormat] and [YResolution] settings.
0When [YFormat] is set to “AVCHD”:
[Setting Values: 9M(LP), 5M(EP), 8M]
0When [YFormat] is set to “QuickTime”:
[Setting Values: 8M, 3M(HQ), 1.2M(LP)]
9SD Aspect
For setting the aspect ratio of the image when
[System] is set to “SD”.
[Setting Values: R16:9, 4:3]
Memo :
0For conditions other than those above, this item
is fixed at “16:9”.
Rec Mode
0For selecting the record mode for recording to
the SD card.
(A P78 [Special Recording] )
0The selectable options vary according to the
[Record Format] menu settings.
Format Frame Rate Setting values
AVCHD 60p, 60i, 50p, 50i Normal, Pre
Rec, Interval
Rec, Frame Rec
QuickTime 60p, 60i, 50p, 50i,
30p, 25p, 24p
Normal, Pre
Rec, Clip
Continuous,
Interval Rec,
Frame Rec
Memo :
0When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup”, this item is
fixed at “Normal”.
9Pre Rec Time
For setting the pre-recording time when [Rec
Mode] is set to “Pre Rec”.
[Setting Values: R5sec, 10sec, 15sec]
Memo :
0When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record Format] B [System] is set to “4K”, this
item is fixed at “5sec”.
9Rec Frames
For setting the number of frames to record when
[Rec Mode] is set to “Frame Rec” or “Interval Rec”.
[Setting Values: R1frame, 3frames, 6frames]
9Rec Interval
For setting the recording time interval when [Rec
Mode] is set to “Interval Rec”.
[Setting Values: R1sec, 2sec, 5sec, 10sec, 30sec,
1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 30min, 1hour]
116 System Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Slot Mode
For setting the operation of the card slot.
0Series:
Mode that activates the two slots sequentially.
0Dual:
Mode that activates the two slots at the same
time.
(A P74 [Dual Rec] )
0Backup:
Mode that enables recording to slot B without
using the [REC] button. This item is selectable
only when [Rec Mode] is set to “Normal”.
Start or stop the recording using the [Backup
Rec] menu or press the [USER1] to [USER7],
[LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶], [LCD KEY▼], [LCD
KEY◀] button that is assigned with “Backup
Trig”.
(A P76 [Backup Rec] )
Memo :
0This item cannot be selected when [Main
Menu] B [System] B [Record Set] B [System] is
set to “HD+Web”.
0When this is set to “Series”, and recordable
media are inserted in both slots, pressing the
[REC] button starts recording only to the card in
the selected slot (active slot).
0When “Series” is selected, and [Record
Format] B [WFormat] is set to “AVCHD”, the
clips are recorded over the slots seamlessly
without interruption in the video.
0When this is set to “Dual”, and recordable media
are inserted in both slots, pressing the [REC]
button starts simultaneous recording to the
cards in both slots.
9Backup Rec
For starting/stopping backup recording with [REC]/
[STBY].
This item is selectable only when [Slot Mode] is set
to “Backup”.
Memo :
0When recording is stopped due to no remaining
space on the media, etc., this item is fixed at
“STOP” and cannot be selected.
4GB File Spanning(SDXC)
A recording file is automatically split when the size
exceeds 4 GB, but you can record clips larger than
4 GB by setting this option to “Off”. (Up to a
maximum of 64 GB or 4 hours)
0On:
Splits a file when it exceeds 4 GB or 30 minutes.
0Off:
Splits a file when it exceeds 64 GB or 4 hours.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo :
0This option is only valid if the SD card used for
recording is of the SDXC format.
0During simultaneous recording, such as Dual
Rec and backup recording, this option is valid
only when the SD cards in both slots are of the
SDXC format.
0This option is valid only when [Record Format]
B [WFormat]/[YFormat] is set to “QuickTime”.
(A P115 [ W Format ] )
(A P115 [ Y Format ] )
LPCM (QuickTime)
For setting the audio recording format of
QuickTime.
[Setting Values: Dual Mono, RStereo]
Time Stamp
For setting whether to display shooting date/time
information in the recorded video.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0The date/time display style can be changed in
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Date Style]/
[Time Style].
(A P108 [ Date Style ] )
(A P108 [ Time Style ] )
0When [System] is set to “4K”, this item is fixed at
“Off”.
System Menu 117
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Clip Set
9Clip Name Prefix
For setting the first four characters of the name of
the clip file to be recorded to the SD card.
Enter any of the 36 characters including alphabets
(upper case) and numbers (0 to 9) using the
software keyboard.
(A P94 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
[Setting Values: xxxG] (The default value of xxx is
the last three digits of the serial number.)
Memo :
0When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record Format] B [WFormat] is set to
“AVCHD”, this setting is not reflected in the file
name of the clip.
However, it is recorded as the display name of
the clip in the thumbnail display.
9Reset Clip Number
For assigning a new number (Clip Number) by
resetting it (0001).
Select [Reset] and press the Set button (R) to reset
the number.
When [WFormat] is set to “AVCHD”, the clip
number is reset to “00000”.
When other clips exist on the SD card, the smallest
available number is used after reset.
0Example:
If the [Clip Name Prefix] is “ABCD”, and
“ABCD0001” already exists on the SD card,
“ABCD0002” will be assigned.
Clear Planning Metadata
Erases the planning metadata downloaded from
the FTP server. K
This item also deletes the metadata loaded using
the setup files (“User File”/“All File”).
Network/Settings Item K
For specifying network-related settings.
The display of the software keyboard for input
varies according to the item you are setting.
(A P94 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
Web
For setting the functions that make use of the web
browser.
9Web Access
To access via a web browser, set to “On”.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
9Camera Name
For setting the name displayed on the web
browser. Enter not more than 8 characters using
the software keyboard.
(Default value: HM200)
9Login Name (Fixed)
The login name is “jvc”. It cannot be changed.
9Login Password
Changes the password for accessing via a web
browser.
The current password is displayed. Enter a new
password directly.
Enter not more than 31 characters using the
software keyboard.
Live Streaming Set
For specifying settings for distributing live video
images.
Memo :
0Users cannot access this menu in the following
cases.
0When [Record Format] B [System] is set to
“4K” or “HD+Web”
0When [Record Format] B [Frame Rate] is set
to “24p”
118 System Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9Live Streaming
Starts live distribution when “On” is selected.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0“On” cannot be selected if network connection
is not established.
0“On” cannot be selected when FTP is running.
0Live streaming switches to “Off” when the power
is turned off.
9Server
For selecting the server for live streaming.
[Setting Values: RServer1, Server2, Server3,
Server4]
Memo :
0The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (Live Streaming set to “On”).
9Streaming Server
For setting the server for live streaming.
Memo :
0The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (Live Streaming set to “On”).
9Server1/Server2/Server3/Server4
*The name that is set in [Alias] is displayed
individually.
oAlias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of
this camera recorder.
The name set in this item will be displayed in the
[Server] options.
* The default value is “Server1/Server2/Server3/
Server4”.
* You can enter up to 31 characters and ASCII
characters.
oType
For setting the system to transfer videos for
distribution.
[Setting Values: RMPEG2-TS/UDP, MPEG2-
TS/TCP, RTSP/RTP, ZIXI, RTMP]
Memo :
0Use reception devices that are compatible with
the respective transfer systems.
0To use the “ZIXI” setting, a dedicated server is
needed separately.
0The following items that can be set vary
depending on the setting of this item.
oDestination Address
For setting details such as the host name and
the IP address of the live distribution destination.
* Enter not more than 127 characters using
single-byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to
9), single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].
oDestination URL
For entering the URL of the live distribution
destination beginning with “rtmp://”.
There is no default value (blank).
* You can enter up to 191 characters and ASCII
characters.
oDestination Port
Enter the network port number of the live
distribution destination using an integer
between 1 and 65535.
When [Type] is set to “MPEG2-TS/UDP” or
“MPEG2-TS/TCP”, the default value is “6504”. If
“ZIXI” is set, the default value is “2088”.
oStream ID
For setting the registered stream ID of the live
distribution destination.
The default value varies with the product model.
* Enter not more than 63 characters.
oStream Key
Enter the stream key specified at the live
transmission destination.
There is no default value (blank).
*Enter not more than 63 characters.
oPassword
For setting the [Stream ID] password.
There is no default value (blank).
*Enter not more than 127 characters.
oLatency
For setting the latency mode.
[Setting Values: Minimun(ZIXI Off), RLow,
Medium]
System Menu 119
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9Resolution
For setting the resolution of the video image during
live distribution.
The available options vary according to the settings
for [WResolution] and [WFrame Rate] under
[Record Format].
W Resolution W Frame Rate
Setting
values
(R: default
value)
1920x1080 60p, 30p R1920x1080,
1280x720,
720x480,
480x270
50p, 25p R1920x1080,
1280x720,
720x576,
480x270
60i R1920x1080,
720x480,
480x270
50i R1920x1080,
720x576,
480x270
1280x720 60p 1280x720,
720x480,
480x270
50p 1280x720,
720x576,
480x270
720x480
(U model)
60i 720x480,
480x270
720x576
(E model)
50i 720x576,
480x270
Memo :
0The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (Live Streaming set to “On”).
0The Aspect Ratio for the live streaming image is
fixed to “16:9”.
9Frame & Bit Rate
For setting the frame rate and encoding bit rate of
the video image during live distribution.
The available options vary according to the settings
for [Resolution] and [Record Format] above, as
well as [WFrame Rate].
W
Frame Rate
Resolution Setting values
(R: default value)
60p, 60i, 30p 1920x1080 60i (12.0 Mbps),
R60i (8.0 Mbps),
60i (5.0 Mbps),
60i (3.0 Mbps)
1280x720 30p (8.0 Mbps),
30p (5.0 Mbps),
30p (3.0 Mbps),
30p (1.5 Mbps)
720x480 60i (8.0 Mbps),
60i (5.0 Mbps),
60i (3.0 Mbps),
60i (1.5 Mbps),
60i (0.8 Mbps),
60i (0.3 Mbps),
60i (0.2 Mbps)
480x270 30p (0.2 Mbps)
50p, 50i, 25p 1920x1080 50i (12.0 Mbps),
R50i (8.0 Mbps),
50i (5.0 Mbps),
50i (3.0 Mbps)
1280x720 25p (8.0 Mbps),
25p (5.0 Mbps),
25p (3.0 Mbps),
25p (1.5 Mbps)
720x576 50i (8.0 Mbps),
50i (5.0 Mbps),
50i (3.0 Mbps),
50i (1.5 Mbps),
50i (0.8 Mbps),
50i (0.3 Mbps),
50i (0.2 Mbps)
480x270 25p (0.2 Mbps)
Memo :
0The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (Live Streaming set to “On”).
0An encoding bit rate exceeding 8.0 Mbps cannot
be selected when [Type] is set to “RTSP/RTP”.
0An encoding bit rate exceeding 5.0 Mbps cannot
be selected when [Type] is set to “ZIXI” and
[Latency] is set to other than “Low”, or when
[Type] is set to “RTMP”.
0An encoding bit rate exceeding 3.0 Mbps cannot
be selected when [Type] is set to “ZIXI” and
[Latency] is set to “Low”.
0Depending on the type of network adapter used
and the connection, the images and audio
sound during live streaming can be choppy.
120 System Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Connection Setup
For configuring the network connection settings.
A [Wizard] screen will appear according to the
adapter connected to the [HOST] terminal. Follow
the instructions to perform the setting.
You can Load, Store, and Delete the settings
specified on the [Wizard] screen.
9Wizard
A [Wizard] appears according to the adapter
connected to the [HOST] terminal.
Follow the instructions.
9Load
Loads the settings on the [Wizard] screen.
(A P166 [Reading the Connection Settings
File] )
9Store
Saves the settings on the [Wizard] screen.
(A P165 [Saving the Connection Settings File] )
9Delete
Deletes the saved settings.
(A P167 [Deleting Connection Settings] )
Metadata Server
For registering the FTP server for importing the
metadata and the path of the file to be imported.
Up to 4 settings can be registered.
9Meta-FTP1 to Meta-FTP4
(The name specified in the respective
[Alias] items is displayed)
oAlias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of
this camera recorder.
The name set in this item will be displayed in the
[Import Metadata] options.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
oProtocol
For setting the protocol of the FTP server to be
connected.
0FTP:
Protocol that does not encrypt the incoming
and outgoing data.
0SFTP:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSH.
0FTPS:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an implicit
mode (starts encrypted communication once
connection starts).
0FTPES:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an explicit
mode (starts encrypted communication after
permission is granted).
[Setting Values: RFTP, SFTP, FTPS, FTPES]
oServer
For setting the server name (“mystation.com”,
etc.) or the IP address (“192.168.0.1”, etc.) of the
FTP server.
* Enter not more than 127 characters using
single-byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to
9), single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].
oPort
Enter the FTP server port number to use using
an integer between 1 and 65535.
The default value varies with the Protocol
setting.
(FTP: 21, SFTP: 22, FTPS: 990, FTPES: 21)
oFile Path
Enter the path name for the metadata file (“/pub/
meta.xml”, “/home/user/meta2.xml”, etc.)
* Enter not more than 127 characters.
oUsername
Enter the user name for connecting to the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
oPassword
Enter the password for connecting to the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
oPASV Mode
For setting whether to set the communication
mode used for file transfer to the passive mode.
Set to “On” if the camera is inside a firewall, and
a connection from the FTP server to the camera
cannot be established.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0When [Protocol] is set to “SFTP”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
System Menu 121
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Clip Server
For setting the server and directory for uploading
recorded clips in the SD card to the FTP server.
9Clip-FTP1 to Clip-FTP4
(The name specified in the respective
[Alias] items is displayed)
oAlias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of
this camera recorder.
The name set in this item will appear on the [FTP
Upload] action screen of the thumbnail display.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
oProtocol
For setting the protocol of the FTP server to be
connected.
0FTP:
Protocol that does not encrypt the incoming
and outgoing data.
0SFTP:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSH.
0FTPS:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an implicit
mode (starts encrypted communication once
connection starts).
0FTPES:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an explicit
mode (starts encrypted communication after
permission is granted).
[Setting Values: RFTP, SFTP, FTPS, FTPES]
oServer
For setting the server name (“mystation.com”,
etc.) or the IP address (“192.168.0.1”, etc.) of the
FTP server.
* Enter not more than 127 characters using
single-byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to
9), single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].
oPort
Enter the FTP server port number to use using
an integer between 1 and 65535.
The default value varies with the Protocol
setting.
(FTP: 21, SFTP: 22, FTPS: 990, FTPES: 21)
oDir. Path
Enter the path name for the directory to upload
to (“/pub”, “/home/user”, etc.)
* Enter not more than 127 characters.
oUsername
Enter the user name for connecting to the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
oPassword
Enter the password for connecting to the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
oPASV Mode
For setting whether to set the communication
mode used for file transfer to the passive mode.
Set to “On” if the camera is inside a firewall, and
a connection from the FTP server to the camera
cannot be established.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0When [Protocol] is set to “SFTP”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
Reset Network
Restores all items in the [Network] menu to their
default settings.
122 System Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Adding/Editing
Frequently Used Menu
Items (Favorites Menu)
You can select and add/edit frequently used menu
items freely to create a personal menu screen
(Favorites Menu).
Memo :
0[Favorites Menu] is only enabled in the Camera
mode. [Favorites Menu] remains unchanged
even when the recording format changes.
0Up to 20 menu items can be added.
0Added items in [Favorites Menu] will not be reset
even when [Main Menu] B [Reset All] is
executed.
0Long descriptive names may be displayed for
the menu items in [Favorites Menu] to enable
better understanding.
.
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu
1Press the [MENU] button to open the [Main
Menu] screen.
2Select the menu or submenu item to add.
.
Focus
Display Settings
Meter 2
Memo :
0
Adding items to [Favorites Menu] cannot be
performed in the following cases. [USER3 Add]
is displayed in gray in the operation guide.
0Selected item is already added to [Favorites
Menu].
0Number of menu items that can be added (20
items) is exceeded.
3Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
A screen to confirm the addition appears.
4Select [Add] and press the Set button (R).
The selected menu item is added to [Favorites
Menu].
.
4
Cancel
Add
Focus
Add to Favorites Menu?
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu) 123
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Editing Favorites Menu
You can delete or change the order of the items
added to [Favorites Menu].
Deleting Items from [Favorites Menu]
1Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
APress the [MENU] button to open the
[Main Menu] screen.
BPress the [DISPLAY] button or press and
hold down the [MENU] button to open the
[Favorites Menu] screen.
2Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set
button (R) or crossed-shaped button (I).
The header turns magenta and the editing
mode is activated.
.
2
Header
(Magenta)
Camera Function...
Edit Favorites
Edit Favorites
Favorites Menu
3Select the menu or submenu item to delete.
.
3
Aspect Marker
Edit Favorites
4Press the [C.REVIEW/4] button.
A delete mark (b) appears at the beginning of
the menu item.
.
Aspect Marker
Edit Favorites
Memo :
0When the [C.REVIEW/4] button is pressed
again while the menu item with the delete mark
(b) is selected, the menu item will be excluded
from the items to be deleted and the delete mark
(b) disappears.
5Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]
editing mode appears.
6Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set
button (R).
.
6
Cancel
Exit without Saving
Save & Exit
Edit Favorites
Memo :
0Deletion is not complete until the changes are
saved with [Save & Exit].
0To exit the editing mode without deleting any
items, select [Exit without Saving].
0To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].
124 Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu)
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Changing the Order of Items in [Favorites
Menu]
.
1Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
Press the [MENU] button to open the [Favorites
Menu] screen.
2Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set
button (R) or crossed-shaped button (I).
The header turns magenta and the editing
mode is activated.
.
2
Header
(Magenta)
Camera Function...
Edit Favorites
Edit Favorites
Favorites Menu
3Select the menu or submenu item to move
and press the Set button (R).
The moving mode is activated and a position
selection bar for the move appears.
.
Edit Favorites
Edit Favorites
ND Filter
ND Filter
3
Position
Selection
Bar
4Select the position to move to with the
cross-shaped button (JK).
Move the position selection bar with the cross-
shaped button (JK) and select a position to
move to.
5Press the Set button (R).
The selected item moves to the new position.
.
5
4
ND Filter
ND Filter
Edit Favorites
Edit Favorites
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu) 125
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
6Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]
editing mode appears.
7Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set
button (R).
.
7
Cancel
Exit without Saving
Save & Exit
Edit Favorites
Memo :
0Moving is not complete until the changes are
saved with [Save & Exit].
0To exit the editing mode without saving any
changes, select [Exit without Saving].
0To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].
126 Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu)
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Display Screen in Camera
Mode
Display 0 screen
This screen displays the event. It is also used to
display warnings only.
.
100min
50min
282min
0
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1/ 16
5 . 6 f t
P  15000K
100m
in
50m
in
2
82
m
in
1
/
100
F
1
.
6
18
d
B
AE
+
E
E
6
ND
1
/
16
5
.
6
f
t
P
15000
K
H I
※2
※1
※2
AY
U
XW a
*1 Appears only during warnings
*2 Appears only during operation
Display 1 screen
.
100min
50min
282min
0
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1/16
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P  15000K
a
1
00m
in
5
0mi
n
2
8
2
m
in
※
A
F
K
G J L M
O
Q
P
R
T
S
V
N
U
X
YW
H I
* Appears only during warnings
Display 2 screen
.
100min
50min
282min
0
1/100
F1. 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1/16
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00:00: 00.00
3840x2160
30p 150M
5 . 6 f t
4030 20 10 0P  15000K
a
F
K
J
A
C
LM
O
Q
P
R
T
S
V
ZX
D
E
B
Y
N
U
W
G H I
AOK Mark
Displayed when OK mark has been appended.
(A P88 [Appending/Deleting OK Mark] )
BVoltage/Battery Power
Displays the current status of the power supply
in use.
(A P31 [Power Status Display] )
Memo :
0Displayed in the Display 0 and Display 1 screens
during warnings only.
CRemaining Space on Media
Displays the remaining recording time of the SD
cards in slot A and slot B separately.
W: Currently selected slot. (White card)
W z: Write-protect switch of SD card is set.
W!INVALID : SD card cannot be read or
written to, or restored.
W!FORMAT : SD card requires
formatting.
W!RESTORE : SD card requires restoring.
W
!INCORRECT
:
0When an SD card lower than UHS-I U3 is
inserted while in the 4K mode.
0When Record Set is set to other than
“AVCHD”/“SD”/“Web” with a Class 4 SD
card inserted.
0When the SD card is not supported.
0When an SD card lower than Class 10 is
inserted while in the XHQ mode.
W!REC INH :
0When attempting to record in 50i(HQ)/
50i(SP) to an SD card recorded in
AVCHD60i(HQ)/60i(SP) (or vice versa).
0When attempting to record more than 4
GB while a media that does not support
recording of more than 4 GB is inserted.
(A P117 [ 4GB File Spanning(SDXC) ] )
The following icons are displayed during FTP
upload. K
(A P148 [Uploading a Recorded Video Clip
K] )
Display Screen in Camera Mode 127
Display/Status Screen
Icon Status
.
FTP transfer is in progress.
Three images are alternately
displayed, and the arrows
become animated. In this case,
instead of the recordable time of
the SD card, an estimated value
of the remaining transfer time is
displayed.
.
(Yellow)
Error has occurred during FTP
transfer.
Memo :
0This item is not displayed when [Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Media
Remain] is set to “Off”. However, warnings will
be displayed.
(A P107 [ Media Remain ] )
0Displayed on the Display 0 and Display 1
screens only in the case of warnings. (When the
remaining time is shorter than 3 minutes)
The icons appear on all display screens in the
following cases.
0When recording is performed to only one
of the slots while [Main Menu] B [System]
B [Record Set] B [Slot Mode] is set to
“Dual”.
(A P117 [ Slot Mode ] )
0When recording is performed to only one
of the slots while [Main Menu] B [System]
B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B
[System] is set to “HD+Web”.
(A P115 [ System ] )
0The displayed time is an estimate.
DResolution
Displays the video image resolution.
Memo :
0This item is not displayed when [Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Record
Format] is set to “Off”.
(A P107 [ Record Format ] )
EFrame Rate/Bit Rate
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.
Memo :
0This item is not displayed when [Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Record
Format] is set to “Off”.
(A P107 [ Record Format ] )
FAudio Level Meter
0Displays the audio levels of CH1 and CH2.
0The V icon appears on the screen when in
Manual mode.
.
4030 20 10 0
0When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] is set to “Frame Rec” or
“Interval Rec”, audio cannot be recorded and
the audio level meter is grayed out.
Memo :
0This item is not displayed when [Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Audio Meter]
is set to “Off”.
(A P107 [ Audio Meter ] )
GImage Stabilizer Mark
Displayed when the image stabilizer is ON.
i:When [Level] of [OIS] is set to
“Normal”.
j: When [Level] of [OIS] is set to “High”.
Memo :
0If image stabilizer is set to “OFF” when the
Display 0 screen is displayed, h appears for 3
seconds.
0Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
HVolume Operation Indicator
The display appears when the volume (0 to 15)
of the headphone or speaker changes.
.
12
0
Memo :
0There is no audio output from the speaker in
Camera mode.
IFULL AUTO ON/OFF
Press and hold the [FULL AUTO] button to
switch on or off.
If FULL AUTO is enabled, the v icon appears.
128 Display Screen in Camera Mode
Display/Status Screen
JAE Lock
The U icon is displayed during AE lock.
KWhite Balance Mode
Displays the current white balance mode.
(*****K indicates color temperature)
A<*****K> : When the white balance is set to
A.
B<*****K> : When the white balance is set to
B.
P<*****K> : When the white balance is set to
PRST.
P<
R
*****K> : The color temperature setting with
respect to the Auto WB value is
appropriate when white balance
is set to PRST and the WB
indicator to “On”,
<WBL> : Locked in the Full Auto White
Balance mode.
(A P107 [ WB Indicator ] )
Memo :
0Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
LShutter
0The current shutter speed is displayed when
the shutter is set to “Manual”.
(A P96 [ Shutter ] )
0The shutter speed display disappears when
the [FULL AUTO] button is pressed and held
down to set to “ON” to enable the Full Auto
shooting mode, or when the [SHUTTER]
button is pressed to enable the Automatic
Shutter mode.
Memo :
0The variable range of the shutter speed varies
according to the video format settings.
(A P58 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )
0Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
MIris F-Number
Displays F-number of the lens iris.
(A P55 [Adjusting the Iris] )
NGain
0Displays the gain value when in the Manual
Gain mode.
0The gain value is not displayed in the “AGC”
mode.
0“LUX30” or “LUX36” is displayed when in the
low-light shooting mode.
Memo :
0Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
OAE Level
0Displayed when the AE function is activated.
0When operated while manual operation is
disabled, “AE” blinks for about 5 seconds.
0When face detection is enabled and [Face
Detect] is set to “AF&AE”, q appears on the
left side of “AE”.
(A P53 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face
Detection] )
PND Filter Position
Displays the current ND filter position.
Memo :
0This item is not displayed when [Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [ND Filter] is
set to “Off”.
(A P107 [ ND Filter ] )
0Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
QFocus Display
0Displays the value of the focal length during
manual focus.
0There is no icon display in Auto Focus mode.
However, the Auto Focus icon e appears
with q only when face detection is enabled.
(A P53 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face
Detection] )
(A P98 [ Face Detect ] )
0If [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [AF
Assist] is set to “Area”, the icon appears
on the left side of e.
(A P97 [ AF Assist ] )
Memo :
0You can specify whether to display the focus
value (“Feet”/“Meter”) or turn off the display in
[Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B
[Focus].
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is
selected.
(A P107 [ Focus ] )
0Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
Display Screen in Camera Mode 129
Display/Status Screen
RFocus Assist
0“FOCUS” is displayed when auto focus is
activated.
0When ACCU-Focus is enabled, “ACCU-
FOCUS” blinks for about 10 seconds while
Focus Assist starts up, after which the
“FOCUS” indicator lights up.
0If recording starts while [ACCU-Focus] is
active, [ACCU-Focus] will be forcibly
deactivated.
(A P105 [ Focus Assist ] )
Memo :
0Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
SDate/Time Display
Displays the current date and time.
Memo :
0The date/time display style can be specified in
[Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B
[Date Style]/[Time Style].
(A P108 [ Date Style ] )
(A P108 [ Time Style ] )
0This item is not displayed when [Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Date/Time] is
set to “Off”.
(A P108 [ Date/Time ] )
0When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Time Stamp] is set to “On”, this item is not
displayed.
(A P117 [ Time Stamp ] )
TZoom Display
0Displays the zoom position. (Zoom bar or
value)
Dynamic Zoom Off:
.
Dynamic Zoom On:
.
0The zoom bar will only be displayed for 3
seconds after the zoom operation is
activated.
0The value will always be displayed.
Dynamic Zoom Off : Z00 to 99
Dynamic Zoom On : Z100 to 149
Memo :
0You can specify the display method (Number/
Bar) and whether to turn off the display in [LCD/
VF] B [Display Settings] B “Zoom”.
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is
selected.
(A P107 [ Zoom ] )
0Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
UNetwork Connection Icon K
The network connection status is displayed
when [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network] is
set to “On”.
This icon is not displayed when “Off” is selected.
(A P113 [ Network K ] )
Icon Status
.
(Blink)
Connection is not established
(starting up, preparing for
connection)
.
(Yellow)
Connection is not established
(preparing for connection)
.
Connection is established
.
When a USB adapter different
from the connection settings is
detected
(No display) When an incompatible USB
adapter is detected, or when
[Network] is set to “Off”
Memo :
0When a cellular adapter that supports LTE
connection display is in use, “LTE” will appear to
the left of the above icon when LTE connection
is detected.
VTime Code (I)/User’s Bit (J) Display
0Displays the time code (hour: minute:
second: frame) or user’s bit data recorded in
the SD card being played back.
0Example of time code display:
.
00:00:00:00
※
* Colon (:) denotes non-drop frames and dot (.)
denotes drop frames.
0Example of user’s bit display:
.
FF EE DD 20
130 Display Screen in Camera Mode
Display/Status Screen
Memo :
0You can specify whether to display the time
code, user’s bit, or turn off the display in
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [TC/UB].
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is
selected.
(A P107 [ TC/UB ] )
WLive streaming mark K
When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Live Streaming Set] B [Live
Streaming] is set to “On”, the distribution status
is displayed.
(A P119 [ Live Streaming ] )
Icon Status
.
(Red)
Distribution in progress (good
connection quality)
.
(Red)
Distribution in progress (poor
connection quality)
.
(Yellow)
Connection pending or
connection failed
XEvent/Warning Display Area
Displays error messages.
(A P170 [Error Messages and Actions] )
YMedia Status
---- : No card found in the selected
slot
STBY : Recording standby
RREC : Recording
REVIEW : Clip Review
(A P73 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately
(Clip Review)] )
STBY P: Pre Rec recording standby
(A P78 [Pre Rec] )
RRECP: Pre Rec recording
(A P78 [Pre Rec] )
STBY C: Clip Continuous Rec recording
standby
(A P79 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
RRECC: Clip Continuous Rec recording
(A P79 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
STBYC
(displayed in
yellow)
: Clip Continuous Rec recording
pause
(A P79 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
STBY N: Interval Rec recording standby
(A P81 [Interval Rec] )
STBYN
(displayed in
red)
: Interval recording pause
RRECN: Interval Rec recording
(A P81 [Interval Rec] )
STBY M: Frame Rec recording standby
(A P80 [Frame Rec] )
RRECM: Frame Rec recording
(A P80 [Frame Rec] )
STBYM
(displayed in
yellow)
: Frame Rec recording pause
(A P80 [Frame Rec] )
STOP : Unable to record to the card in
the slot
P.OFF : Power OFF
ZDual Rec/Backup Rec Display
“DUAL” is displayed in the Dual Rec mode and
“BACKUP” is displayed in the Backup Rec
mode.
(A P117 [ Slot Mode ] )
Memo :
0This item is not displayed when [Slot Mode] is
set to “Series”.
0This item is not displayed when [Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Media
Remain] is set to “Off”. However, warnings will
be displayed.
(A P107 [ Media Remain ] )
0Displayed in the Display 0 and Display 1 screens
during warnings only. (When the remaining time
is shorter than 3 minutes)
aSDI Record Trigger K
STBY B:When [SDI Rec Trigger] is set to
“On” and recording is stopped
REC B: When [SDI Rec Trigger] is set to
“On” and recording is in progress
Display Screen in Camera Mode 131
Display/Status Screen
Display Screen in Media
Mode
Media Display 0 Screen
This screen displays the media status or event. It
is also used to display warnings only.
.
282min 00:00:00.00
1000/ 2000
0
A
GI
M
PN
OL
2
82
m
i
n
※
* Appears only during warnings
Media Display 1 Screen
.
282min
0
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00:00:00.00
3840x2160
30p 150M
4030 20 10 0
1000/ 2000
A
F
GI
J
KM
PN
C
D
OL
B
Media Display 2 Screen
.
282min
0
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00:00:00.00
3840x2160
30p 150M
4030 20 10 0
1000/ 2000
B
A
F
GI
J
KM
PN
C
D
O
E
L
H
AMedia
0Displays the media slot (W or Y) of the
currently played clip.
0z appears when the write-protect switch of
the SD card is set.
BVoltage/Battery Power
Displays the current status of the power supply
in use.
(A P31 [Power Status Display] )
Memo :
0Displayed in the Media Display 0 screen during
warnings only.
CResolution
Displays the video image resolution.
DFrame Rate/Bit Rate
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.
EOperation Guide
Displays a guide for the current operation
buttons.
FAudio Level Meter
Displays the audio levels of CH1 and CH2.
.
4030 20 10 0
Memo :
0This item is not displayed when [Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Audio Meter]
is set to “Off”.
(A P107 [ Audio Meter ] )
GVolume Operation Indicator
0The display appears when the volume (0 to
15) of the headphone or speaker changes.
(A P128 [Volume Operation Indicator] )
HPosition bar
Displays the current position in the video.
During trimming, the position bar appears in
green, and icons for the in and out points are
displayed.
6: Current position of the video
7: Position to start trimming
(In point)
8: Position to end trimming
(Out point)
132 Display Screen in Media Mode
Display/Status Screen
IInformation Display
The camera information display turns on and off
each time you press the [OIS/6] button.
0Camera information display displays only
information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White
Balance that have been recorded.
.
P 13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0dB
Camera Information Display
Memo :
0Trimming information is displayed while
trimming is in progress. In this case, pressing the
[OIS/6] button does not switch the display.
JDate/Time Display
Displays the date/time that is recorded on the
currently played SD card.
Memo :
0The date/time display style can be specified in
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Date Style]/
[Time Style].
(A P108 [ Date Style ] )
(A P108 [ Time Style ] )
KTime Code (I)/User’s Bit (J) Display
0Displays the time code (hour: minute:
second: frame) or user’s bit data recorded in
the SD card being played back.
0Example of time code display:
.
00:00:00:00
※
* Colon (:) denotes non-drop frames and dot (.)
denotes drop frames.
0Example of user’s bit display:
.
FF EE DD 20
Memo :
0You can specify whether to display the time
code, user’s bit, or turn off the display in [TC/UB]
of [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [Display
Settings].
(A P107 [ TC/UB ] )
LEvent/Warning Display Area
Displays error messages.
(A P170 [Error Messages and Actions] )
MMedia Status
PLAY : Playing
STILL : Still picture playback mode
FWD * : High-speed playback in the
forward direction (* playback
speed: 5x, 15x, 60x, or 360x)
REV * : High-speed playback in the
reverse direction (* reverse
playback speed: 5x, 15x, 60x, or
360x)
STOP : Stop mode
P.OFF : Power OFF
NCheck Mark
Displayed when the currently played clip is
selected.
OOK Mark
Displayed when OK mark has been appended.
(A P88 [Appending/Deleting OK Mark] )
PClip Information
Displays current clip number/total number of
clips.
Display Screen in Media Mode 133
Display/Status Screen
Status Screen
For checking the settings of the camera recorder.
Camera 1 Screen/Camera 2 Screen
For checking information related to shooting using
the camera recorder.
.
Aspect Marker
Zebra
Camera 1
Safety Zone
Format
Format
None
Handle Zoom Speed H
Handle Zoom Speed M
Handle Zoom Speed L
GAIN H
GAIN M
GAIN L
FAW
Camera 2
Off
USER Switch Set Screen
For checking the status (functions assigned) of the
user buttons.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
.
TC Preset
USER Switch Set
Focus Assist
Lolux
Clip Review
Zebra
OIS
Rec
USER7
USER6
USER5
USER4
USER3
USER2
USER1
Audio Screen
For checking settings related to audio level and
audio.
(A P110 [Audio Set Item] )
.
Audio
-62dB
Video Screen
For checking the settings related to video output.
(A P109 [Video Set Item] )
.
HDMI Enhance
HDMI Color
Resolution
HDMI/SDI Out
Video
7.5%
SDI Rec Trigger
SD Aspect
SD Set Up
Squeeze
HDMI+SDI
1080i
Auto
Off
Off
Planning Metadata Screen
For checking the current planning metadata
setting.
(A P151 [ Planning Metadata ] )
.
Planning Metadata
Creator
Description
Title2
Title1
Network Screen K
For checking the network-related settings.
(A P121 [ Wizard ] )
.
HM200
Network
WPA2
P2P
MAC Address
IP Address
Passphrase
Security Type
SSID
Ty p e
134 Status Screen
Display/Status Screen
Marker and Safety Zone
Displays (Camera Mode
Only)
The marker and safety zone displays are useful in
helping you determine the angle of view for the
image according to the shooting purpose.
The marker is displayed only in the Camera mode.
Displaying the Grid Marker
1Set [LCD/VF] B [Marker Settings] B [Grid
Marker] to “On”.
(A P106 [ Grid Marker ] )
A grid that divides the screen into 3x3 is
displayed.
.
Memo :
0When [Grid Marker] is set to “On”, [Aspect
Ratio], [Aspect Marker], and [Safety Zone] do
not function.
0
Example of display when [Aspect Ratio] = “4:3”,
[Aspect Marker] = “Line+Halftone”, and [Center
Mark] = “On”
.
Aspect Marker
Center MarkSafety Zone
Memo :
0You can turn On/Off the safety zone and center
mark displays using [LCD/VF] B [Marker
Settings] B [Aspect Ratio], [Safety Zone], and
[Center Mark].
(A P106 [ Safety Zone ] )
Color Bar Output
Color bars can be output on this camera recorder.
Memo :
0The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output
simultaneously with the color bar output.
(A P112 [ Test Tone ] )
To Output the Color Bar Using the Menu
To output color bars, follow the setting procedure
below.
1Set [Camera Function] B [Bars] to “On”.
(A P96 [ Bars ] )
Color bars are output.
To Output the Color Bar Using the User Button
1Assign the “Bars” function to any of the
user buttons.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
2Press the user button that is assigned with
“Bars”.
Color bars are output.
Marker and Safety Zone Displays (Camera Mode Only) 135
Camera Features
Configuring Setup Files
The menu settings can be stored on an SD card by
saving them as a setup file.
Loading a saved setup file enables you to
reproduce the appropriate setup state speedily.
The following types of setup files are available.
oPicture file:
File that contains image creation settings in
accordance to the shooting conditions ([Camera
Process] menu items).
oAll File:
File that contains all menu settings, ranging from
video format settings to image creation settings
such as device settings and shooting
conditions, as well as the contents of the
[Favorites Menu].
oUser File:
File that contains settings from All File that are
not included in the [Camera Process] menu
items.
(A P100 [Camera Process Menu] )
Memo :
0Make use of the [Setup File] menu to save or
load a setup file.
0The following operations can be performed on
the [Setup File] menu.
0[Saving Setup Files] (A P 136)
0[Loading a Setup File] (A P 137)
Number of Storable Setup Files
SD slot A : [ W 1 ] to [ W 8 ]
SD slot B : [ Y 1 ] to [ Y 8 ]
Compatibility
oUser File/All File
0Only User File/All File of the GY-HM200 and
GY-HM170 series can be loaded.
0When User FileAll File] saved using GY-
HM200 are loaded using GY-HM170, the
functions that only exist on GY-HM200 are
ignored.
oPicture file
Only picture files of the GY-HM200 and GY-
HM170 series can be loaded.
Saving Setup Files
1Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [Main Menu] B [System] B [Setup File]
and press the Set button (R).
(A P113 [ Setup File ] )
2Select [Store File] and press the Set button
(R).
3Select [Picture File], [User File] or [All File],
and press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
4Select the file to be newly saved (or
overwritten) using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
.
4
<no file>
<no file>
<no file>
<no file>
<no file>
<no file>
Store Picture File
Memo :
0Files cannot be written in the following cases.
(Displayed in gray, selection disabled)
0
When the inserted SD card is not supported or
not formatted. (File name appears as “---”.)
0When a write-protected SD card is inserted
(a z mark appears beside the SD card icon).
5Name the file.
0Enter the subname using the software
keyboard.
(A P94 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
0You can enter up to 8 characters for the
[Store File]/[Picture File] subname.
Memo :
0When overwriting an existing file, the subname
of the existing file is displayed.
0Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or
press the [CANCEL] button to return to the
previous screen.
136 Configuring Setup Files
Camera Features
6Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).
.
6
5
7Save the file.
0A confirmation screen appears when you
choose to overwrite.
Select [Overwrite] on the confirmation
screen, and press the Set button (R). Saving
starts, and “Storing...” appears on the screen.
.
:SUNSET
7
Load Picture File
Cancel
Overwrite
Overwrite Picture File?
0Saving starts, and “Storing...” appears on the
screen when the file is newly saved.
.
8Saving is complete.
After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
Loading a Setup File
1Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [Main Menu] B [System] B [Setup File]
and press the Set button (R).
(A P113 [ Setup File ] )
2Select [Load File] and press the Set button
(R).
3Select [Picture File], [User File] or [All File],
and press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
4Select the file to load using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
.
4
Load Picture File
Memo :
0When the write-protect switch of the inserted SD
card is set, a z mark appears beside the SD
card icon. Setup files can be loaded from an SD
card even if the write-protect switch is set.
0Setup files that are completely incompatible will
not be displayed.
(A P136 [Configuring Setup Files] )
5Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears on the
screen.
.
5
Cancel
Load
Load Picture File?
6Reading is complete.
After reading of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
Configuring Setup Files 137
Camera Features
Connecting External
Monitor
0To output live or playback video images and
audio sound to an external monitor, select the
output signals from the camera recorder, and
connect using an appropriate cable according to
the monitor to be used.
0Choose the most suitable terminal according to
the monitor in use.
0[SDI OUT] terminal K:
Outputs either the 3G-SDI/HD-SDI signal or SD-
SDI signal.
0[AV] terminal:
Outputs composite video and audio signals.
0[HDMI] terminal:
Outputs HDMI signals.
Memo :
0If the [SDI OUT] terminal or [HDMI] terminal is
connected, configure the settings in the [A/V
Set] menu according to the monitor to be
connected.
(A P109 [ HDMI/SDI Out K ] )
(A P109 [ HDMI Out M ] )
.
GY-HM200U/
GY-HM200E only
SDI IN
HDMI
AV input
Audio (Lch)
Audio (Rch)
Video
GND
* Select the output signal in [A/V Set] B
[HDMI/SDI Out].
(A P109 [ HDMI/SDI Out K ] )
*
When [Record Format]
B
[System] is set to “SD”,
only SD-SDI signals are output.
(A P115 [ System ] )
* To display the menu screen or display screen on
an external monitor, set [A/V Set] B [Video
Set] B [Display On TV] to “On”.
(A P109 [ Display On TV ] )
138 Connecting External Monitor
Connecting External Devices
Connecting via SDI K
0Digital video signals, together with embedded
(superimposed) audio signals and time code
signals, are output for both the 3G-SDI/HD-SDI
and SD-SDI signals.
Memo :
0The sampling frequency for embedded
(superimposed) audio signals is 48 kHz. Time
code of the built-in time generator as well as
playback time code are also output.
Setting the Aspect
0For setting the mode to convert images with a
16:9 aspect ratio to display on a 4:3 aspect ratio
screen.
0Set using [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [SD
Aspect].
0The available modes include “Letter”
(blackened at the top and bottom) and
“Squeeze” (full size, compressed at the left and
right).
(A P110 [ SD Aspect ] )
Memo :
0
When [Record Format]
B
[System] is set to “SD”,
and [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item cannot be
selected.
(A P115 [ System ] )
(A P116 [ SD Aspect ] )
Connecting the
Headphone
0Select the audio output from the [x] terminal
using [A/V Set] B [Monitor].
(A P112 [ Monitor ] )
.
Memo :
0There is no sound output from the speaker when
the headphone is connected.
Connecting External Monitor 139
Connecting External Devices
Connecting Wired Remote
Control
You can operate the functions of this unit with a
wired remote control.
Memo :
0When the switches of the camera recorder and
remote control unit are operated at the same
time, the switch operation of the remote control
unit takes priority over that of the camera
recorder.
1Connect a wired remote control to the
camera recorder.
Connect the wired remote control (sold
separately) to the [REMOTE] terminal of this
camera recorder.
.
REMOTE
Connect the wired
remote control
Caution :
0Turn off the power of the camera recorder when
connecting a wired remote control.
2Turn on the power of the camera recorder.
Loading Clips to the PC
0You can load clips to a PC by connecting the
camera recorder to the PC via the USB port.
Doing so enables clips stored in the SD card to
be managed and edited on the PC.
0Files on the SD card can be managed/edited on
the connected PC in this mode only for USB
mass storage class devices that are recognized
by the said PC as a peripheral drive.
Memo :
0Files cannot be written to the SD card.
1Connect the camera recorder to the PC
using a USB cable.
A confirmation message “Change to USB
Mode?” to enable the USB connection appears.
.
PC
140 Connecting Wired Remote Control
Connecting External Devices
2Select [Change] using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
The camera recorder switches to USB mode.
.
2
Cancel
Change
Change to USB Mode?
Memo :
0If recording is in progress, the “Change to USB
Mode?” message appears after recording
stops.
0If playback is in progress, the camera recorder
switches to USB mode after the file closes
automatically, such as when playback stops.
Disconnecting
0Disable the connection on the PC, then remove
the USB cable from the camera recorder.
0Doing so exits the USB mode and switches the
camera recorder to Camera mode.
Memo :
0The procedure for disabling the USB connection
varies according to the PC in use. For details,
refer to the instruction manual of the PC.
When your PC cannot recognize the SD
card
Confirm and update the OS of your PC.
OS Description
Windows Vista Necessary to update to SP1
or higher.
Windows Vista SP1/
Windows Vista SP2
Necessary to download the
update software.
(KB975823)
032 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=2d1abe01-
0942-4f8aabb2-
2ad529de00a1
064 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=7d54c53f-017c
-4ea5-
ae08-34c3452ba315
Windows 7 Necessary to download the
update software.
(KB976422)
032 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=3ee91fc2-
a9bc-4ee1-
aca3-2a9aff5915ea
064 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=73f766dd-
7127-4445-
b860-47084587155f
Loading Clips to the PC 141
Connecting External Devices
Functions of Network
Connection K
0The network function can be operated by
connecting one of the following adapters to the
[HOST] terminal at the side terminal section.
0Wireless LAN adapter
0Ethernet adapter
0Cellular adapter
(A P143 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
0The network feature comprises web-browser-
based functions using devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, as well as
FTP and live streaming functions that run via
thumbnail screens and menu operation.
List of Functions
Importing Metadata
You can download a metadata settings file (XML
format) from the FTP server and store metadata in
the camera recorder.
(A P146 [Importing Metadata K] )
Uploading Recorded Clips
You can upload clips recorded in the SD card to a
preset FTP server.
(A P148 [Uploading a Recorded Video Clip
K] )
Memo :
0Uploading can also be performed via a web
browser.
(A P155 [Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web
Browser K] )
Editing Metadata
0Planning Metadata
You can access the page for editing the camera
recorder’s metadata via a web browser on
devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal,
or PC, and edit the metadata that is to be applied
to clips to be recorded.
(A P151 [ Planning Metadata ] )
0Clip Metadata
You can access the page for editing the
metadata via a web browser on devices such as
a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and
display or rewrite the metadata that is recorded
to a clip.
(A P152 [ Clip Metadata ] )
View Remote
You can access via a web browser on devices such
as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to check
the live image or remotely control the camera.
(A P158 [View Remote Feature K] )
Camera Control
You can access via a web browser on devices such
as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to remotely
control the camera.
(A P161 [Camera Control Function K] )
Live streaming
By combining with the decoder or PC application
that supports live streaming, you can perform audio
and video streaming via the network.
(A P167 [Performing Live Streaming K] )
Preparing Network
Connection K
Operating Environment
Operation has been verified for the following
environments.
Computer
0OS: Windows 7
Web browser: Internet Explorer 11
0OS: Mac OSX 10.9
Web browser: Safari 7
Smartphone/Tablet Terminal
0OS: iOS8 (iPhone 5)
Web browser: Safari 7
0OS: iOS8 (iPad 3rd generation)
Web browser: Safari 7
0OS: Android 4 (Nexus 7 2013)
Web browser: Chrome
0OS: Windows 8.1 (Surface)
Web browser: Internet Explorer 11
142 Functions of Network Connection K
Connecting to the Network K
Camera Setup for Network Connection
1Connect an appropriate adapter according
to the intended use to the [HOST] terminal
at the side terminal section of the camera
recorder.
The following adapters can be connected.
0Wireless LAN adapter
0Ethernet adapter
0Cellular adapter
.
Connect an appropriate adapter
Memo :
0Only a network connection adapter can be
connected to the [HOST] terminal.
0Connect or disconnect an adapter only after you
have turned off the power of the camera
recorder.
0You can find the latest information on the
compatible adapters at the product page of our
website.
0Two types of network coverage (WAN and LAN)
are available for each application.
2Enable the network connection.
Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network] to
“On”.
3Configure the connection settings.
0Select [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Connection Setup] B [Wizard]
and press the Set button (R).
0A wizard screen appears according to the
type of adapter connected. Follow the
instructions on the screen to perform setting.
(A P143 [Connecting via Wireless LAN] )
(A P145 [Connecting via Wired LAN] )
(A P145 [Connecting via Cellular Adapter] )
Connecting via Wireless LAN
Connection via Access Point
1Perform setting on the camera recorder,
and start up the [Wizard] screen.
(A P143 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
2[Wireless LAN] appears on the [Wizard]
screen.
.
Back Next
Wireless LAN
Available Adapter
3Press the I button to display the [Select
Connection Type] screen.
Select “Connect with Access Point”.
Follow the screen instructions to complete
setting. Perform setting for the following.
0Mode of connection
0Method of setting
* SSID, type of encryption, Passphrase, and
IP Address setting (“DHCP” or “Manual”) in
cases other than WPS
.
3
Back Next
Connect with Access Point
P2P
Select Connection Type
4Setting is complete.
After setting is complete, you can access the
camera recorder via a web browser.
(A P150 [Connecting from a Web Browser
K] )
Preparing Network Connection K143
Connecting to the Network K
P2P Connection
You can access the web function of this camera
recorder from devices such as a smartphone,
tablet terminal, or PC.
1[Wireless LAN] appears on the [Wizard]
screen.
.
Back Next
Wireless LAN
Available Adapter
2Press the I button to display the [Select
Connection Type] screen.
Select “P2P”.
Follow the screen instructions to complete
setting.
Perform setting for the following.
0Mode of connection
0Method of setting
* SSID and Passphrase in cases other than
WPS
.
2
Back Next
Connect with Access Point
P2P
Select Connection Type
Memo :
0When “WPS” is selected in the [Select Setup
Type] screen, the following steps 3 and 4 are not
required.
3Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode, and display the [Network] (status)
screen.
0Press the [STATUS] button on the camera
recorder to display the status screen.
Press the cross-shaped button (HI) to
display the [Network] screen.
0Check to ensure that the [SSID] and
[Passphrase] that you have set in the wizard
are displayed.
.
HM200
Network
WPA2
P2P
MAC Address
IP Address
Passphrase
Security Type
SSID
Ty p e
4Select [SSID] from the list of access points
(smartphone, tablet terminal, PC, etc.), and
enter [Passphrase].
0Display the list of access points in the
wireless connection settings of the
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and
select “HM200-*****”. (***** are numbers that
vary with the device used.)
0After the password confirmation screen
appears, enter the [Passphrase] displayed
on the [Network] screen.
.
5Setting is complete.
After setting is complete, you can access the
camera recorder via a web browser.
(A P150 [Connecting from a Web Browser
K] )
144 Preparing Network Connection K
Connecting to the Network K
Connecting via Wired LAN
You can connect a device such as a smartphone,
tablet terminal, or PC directly to the camera
recorder using a cross cable to access the camera
recorder’s web functions. Alternatively, you can
also connect using an Ethernet hub.
1Connect the [HOST] terminal on the camera
recorder to the smartphone, tablet
terminal, PC, etc. using a cross cable.
2Perform setting on the camera recorder,
and start up the [Wizard] screen.
(A P143 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
3[Ethernet] appears on the [Wizard] screen.
.
Back Next
Ethernet
Available Adapter
4Press the I button to display the [IP
Address Configuration] screen.
Follow the screen instructions to complete
setting. Perform setting for the following.
0IP address setting (DHCP or manual)
0IP Address
0Subnet Mask
0Gateway
0DNS Server
.
DHCP
Back Next
Manual
IP Address Configuration
5Setting is complete.
After setting is complete, you can access the
camera recorder via a web browser.
(A P150 [Connecting from a Web Browser
K] )
Connecting via Cellular Adapter
You can make use of the FTP function and live
streaming function by connecting a cellular adapter
to this camera recorder.
1Connect the cellular adapter to the [HOST]
terminal of the camera recorder.
2Perform setting on the camera recorder,
and start up the [Wizard] screen.
(A P143 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
3[Cellular] appears on the [Wizard] screen.
.
Back Next
Celluar
Available Adapter
4Press the I button.
Follow the screen instructions to complete
setting. Perform setting for the following.
0Connection phone number
0User name
0Password
Caution :
0You can access the web functions via a web
browser on devices such as a smartphone,
tablet terminal, or PC only in a LAN environment.
0Note that you may have to pay very high bills in
the case of pay-per-use contracts. Fixed price
contract is recommended if you are using the
network function.
0Note that the use of improper settings may result
in expensive bills from the phone service
provider. Make sure that the setting is correct.
0To avoid expensive bills due to the roaming
connection, you are recommended to use this
function by disabling the roaming contract.
0There may be communication even when you
are not using the network function. Remove the
cellular adapter when the function is not in use.
Preparing Network Connection K145
Connecting to the Network K
Importing Metadata K
You can download a metadata settings file (XML
format) from the FTP server and store metadata in
the camera recorder.
The imported metadata is applied to clips to be
recorded.
Preparing Metadata
0You can record the four metadata types below.
Title1 : ASCII only, max. 63 characters
(bytes)
Title2 : UNICODE, max. 127 bytes
Creator : UNICODE, max. 127 bytes
Description : UNICODE, max. 2047 bytes
0Metadata makes use of the XML description
format.
0Edit the
<Title1><Title2><Description><Creator> tag
element using the XML editor. (Indicated by the
frames below)
.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<NRT-MetaInterface lastUpdate="2012-07-26T18:06:21+09:00"
xmlns="urn:schemas-proHD:nonRealTimeMetaInterface:ver.1.00"
xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">
<MetaData>
<Title1>Title1 sample</Title1>
<!-- only "en",max63bytes -->
<Title2>Title2 sample</Title2>
<!-- ,max127bytes -->
<Description>Description sample</Description>
<!-- ,max2047bytes -->
<Creator>Creator sample</Creator>
<!-- ,max127bytes -->
</MetaData>
</NRT-MetaInterface>
Configuring the Server for Downloading
For specifying the settings for connecting to the
FTP server for downloading the metadata (domain
name, user name, password, etc.) as well as the
path of the file to download.
1Open the [Metadata Server] screen.
Open the [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Metadata Server] screen.
.
Meta-FTP4...
Meta-FTP3...
Meta-FTP2...
Meta-FTP1...
Metadata Server
2Register the [Metadata Server].
0Select a server using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
The server settings screen appears. Perform
setting for each item.
0Up to 4 settings can be registered.
(A P121 [ Metadata Server ] )
.
Username
File Path
Port
Server
Protocol
Alias
Metadata Server Set
Memo :
0For details on the registered information, please
consult the network administrator for the server.
146 Importing Metadata K
Connecting to the Network K
Importing Metadata
Download the metadata settings file (XML format)
from the FTP server.
1Select [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]
B [Import Metadata] and press the Set
button (R).
The [Import Metadata] screen appears.
.
Import Metadata
2Select the server for importing the
metadata.
0The name that is registered in [Metadata
Server] B [Alias] is displayed.
0Select a server using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
.
2
Import Metadata
3Select [Import] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Import starts.
After import is complete, the display is restored
to the screen before the [Import Metadata]
screen appears.
.
3
Importing...
Cancel
Import
Import Metadata?
Memo :
0You cannot exit the menu or perform recording
while import is in progress.
0If import of the metadata failed, “Import Error!” is
displayed, and a message indicating the cause
of the error appears.
Press the Set button (R) to return to the [Import
Metadata] screen in step 1.
(A P171 [List of FTP Transfer Errors K] )
0When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
connections to the servers other than “FTP”
protocol cannot be made.
0If a setting other than “FTP” is specified for
[Protocol], to ensure the safety of the
communication path, a screen appears
prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the
public key and certificate received from the
server.
Check to ensure that the displayed value
coincides with the known value.
Importing Metadata K147
Connecting to the Network K
Uploading a Recorded
Video Clip K
Upload clips recorded in the SD card to a preset
FTP server.
Configuring the FTP Server for
Uploading
For specifying the settings for connecting to the
FTP server to upload recorded clips to (domain
name, user name, password, etc.) as well as the
directory of the upload destination.
1Open the [Clip Server] screen.
Open the [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Clip Server] screen.
.
Clip Server
2Register the [Clip Server].
Register the server to upload recorded clips in
the SD card to.
Up to 4 servers can be registered.
(A P122 [ Clip Server ] )
Memo :
0For details on the registered information, please
consult the network administrator for the server.
Uploading Video Clip
Upload clips recorded in the SD card to a preset
FTP server.
All playable clips on the thumbnail screen can be
uploaded.
Uploading a Video Clip
1Set the camera recorder to the Media mode.
0Press and hold the [MODE] selection button
in Camera mode to enter Media mode. A
thumbnail screen of the clips recorded on the
SD card is displayed.
0You can upload the selected clips on the
thumbnail screen to the FTP server.
(A P83 [Thumbnail Screen] )
2Move the cursor to the clip to be uploaded.
Move the cursor to the clip to be uploaded using
the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
.
2
3Press the [ZEBRA/5] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
.
All Clips
Selected Clips
This Clip
3
4Select [FTP Upload] B [This Clip] B server
to upload to, and press the Set button (R).
The status of the transfer process is indicated
by a progress bar.
.
Upload in Background
Stop
FTP Upload
Memo :
0The name for the server to upload files to are
indicated using the preset names in [Clip
Server] B [Alias].
0To stop uploading, press the Set button (R).
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and
press the Set button (R) to stop uploading and
return to the thumbnail screen.
148 Uploading a Recorded Video Clip K
Connecting to the Network K
5Upload is complete.
0After upload is complete, “Successfully
Completed.” appears on the screen.
0Press the Set button (R) to return to the
thumbnail screen.
.
5
Exit
Successfully Completed.
FTP Upload
Selecting and Uploading Multiple Clips
To select and upload multiple clips, refer to
“[Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple
Clips] (A P 89)”.
Uploading All Video Clips
1Press the [ZEBRA/5] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
2Upload the clips.
Select [FTP Upload...] B [All Clips] B server to
upload to, and press the Set button (R).
.
All Clips
Selected Clips
This Clip
2
3Upload starts.
The status of the transfer process is indicated
by a progress bar.
.
Upload in Background
Stop
FTP Upload
Memo :
0To stop uploading, press the Set button (R).
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and
press the Set button (R) to stop uploading and
return to the thumbnail screen.
0If the file to be uploaded has the same name as
an existing file in the FTP server, an overwrite
confirmation window appears.
0When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
the overwrite confirmation window will not be
displayed and the existing file is overwritten.
0Even after upload has started (FTP transfer in
progress) in step 3, pressing the [MODE] button
switches the camera recorder to the Camera
mode, allowing you to start shooting.
0If a setting other than “FTP” is specified for
[Protocol], to ensure the safety of the
communication path, a screen appears
prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the
public key and certificate received from the
server.
Check to ensure that the displayed value
coincides with the known value.
0Fingerprint is a unique value that varies with
each public key and certificate.
0For details of the fingerprint, please consult
the administrator of the server to be
connected.
(A P122 [ Clip Server ] )
0When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
connections to the servers other than “FTP”
protocol cannot be made.
Uploading a Recorded Video Clip K149
Connecting to the Network K
4Upload is complete.
0After all clips are uploaded successfully,
“Successfully Completed.” is displayed.
Press the Set button (R) to return to the
thumbnail screen.
0When clips are not uploaded successfully,
the following errors are displayed.
.
Cause of
Error
Exit
Internal Error.
Failed.
FTP Upload
(A P171 [List of FTP Transfer Errors K] )
Memo :
0If there is an error message or other notifications
when you switched to the Camera mode while
FTP upload is in progress, a 5 icon (yellow) will
appear in the remaining media space display
area in the Camera mode.
You can press the [MODE] button to switch to
the Media mode and display the above error
screen.
Follow “[List of FTP Transfer Errors K]
(A P 171)” to clear the error display.
Connecting from a Web
Browser K
You can access the web functions of this camera
recorder via a web browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
Make the necessary preparations for connection in
advance.
(A P143 [Connect an appropriate adapter
according to the intended use to the [HOST]
terminal at the side terminal section of the
camera recorder.] )
1Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode, and display the [Network] (status)
screen.
0Press the [STATUS] button on the camera
recorder to display the status screen.
Press the cross-shaped button (HI) to
display the [Network] screen.
0Check the displayed [IP Address].
.
192.168.0.1
HM200
Network
WPA2
P2P
MAC Address
IP Address
Passphrase
Security Type
SSID
Ty p e
2Start up the web browser on the terminal
you wish to connect to the camera
recorder, and enter the [IP Address] in the
address field.
(Example: 192.168.0.1)
If “192.168.0.1” is displayed in [IP Address],
enter “http://192.168.0.1”.
.
http://192.168.0.1
150 Uploading a Recorded Video Clip K
Connecting to the Network K
3Enter the user name and password.
Enter the user name (jvc) and the password
(initial password: 0000) on the login screen to
display the main page of the camera.
.
Memo :
0The password can be altered in [Main Menu] B
[System] B [Network]/[Settings] B [Web] B
[Change Password].
(A P118 [ Login Password ] )
Editing Metadata K
You can create the metadata to be inserted into a
recorded file, or rewrite the metadata of a recorded
clip.
Planning Metadata
You can access the page for editing the camera
recorder’s metadata via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and
edit the metadata that is to be applied to clips to be
recorded.
1Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P150 [Connecting from a Web Browser
K] )
2Tap (click) the [Planning Metadata] tab to
open the [Planning Metadata] screen.
.
2
Connecting from a Web Browser K151
Connecting to the Network K
3Editing Metadata
AEnter information for the necessary fields.
BAfter input is complete, tap (click) [Save] to
overwrite the metadata.
.
A
B
Keyboard
Done
4Tap (click) [OK] on the confirmation screen.
0Update of the [Planning Metadata] starts.
0After update is complete, “Renewal of
planning metadata is succeeded.” is
displayed. Tap (click) [OK].
0Returns to the screen in step 3.
.
4
OK
Renewal of planning metadata is
succeeded.
Memo :
0If update failed, “Renewal of planning metadata
is failed.” is displayed.
Tap (click) [Close] to return to the screen of step
3.
Clip Metadata
You can access the page for editing the metadata
via a web browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and display or
rewrite the metadata that is recorded to a clip.
1Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P150 [Connecting from a Web Browser
K] )
2Display the clip list.
Tap (click) the [Clip List] tab to display the clip
list.
.
2
3Set the camera recorder to the “Remote
Edit Mode”.
You can switch to “Remote Edit Mode” from a
web browser or through operation of the
camera.
152 Editing Metadata K
Connecting to the Network K
oSwitching from a web browser
AYou will see a message indicating “It is
necessary to change the camera mode to
"Remote Edit Mode". Change the mode.”
on the web browser.
.
A
B
ChangeCancel
It is necessary to change the camera
mode to "Remote Edit Mode".
Change the mode.
BTap (click) [Change] to switch the camera
to the Remote Edit mode.
.
Exit
Remote Edit Mode
oSwitching from the camera
A“Change to Remote Edit Mode?” is
displayed on the display screen of the
camera unit.
BSelect [Change] and press the Set button
(R) to switch to the Remote Edit mode.
.
B
A
Exit
Remote Edit Mode
Cancel
Change
Remote Edit Mode?
Change to
Memo :
0When the menu or status is displayed, display
of the confirmation screen will be put on hold.
0If the menu is displayed on the camera recorder,
close the menu.
0If the status is displayed on the camera recorder,
close the status display.
0Pressing the Set button (R) on the camera
recorder while in the Remote Edit Mode ends
the Remote Edit Mode forcibly and switches to
the Camera mode.
0When FTP upload via the camera unit is
currently in progress, switching to the Remote
Edit mode is disabled.
4Select the Metadata Edit mode.
Select the [Metadata] tab.
5Select the clip to rewrite the metadata.
0A list of the recorded clips appears on the
[Clip List] screen.
0Tap (click) the clip for which you want to
rewrite the metadata.
.
4
5
Memo :
0You can switch the displayed slot using the [Slot
A] and [Slot B] tabs.
0You can use the [J-30] or [K+30] tab to jump to
the previous or next 30 clips on the list.
Editing Metadata K153
Connecting to the Network K
6Editing the Metadata of Selected Clips
AEdit the information for the necessary fields.
0If you are using a PC, input using the mouse
and keyboard.
0If you are using a smartphone or tablet
terminal, tap the text input area to display a
standard software keyboard on the screen.
Enter the information using the displayed
keyboard.
BYou can tap (click) [OK Mark] to add an OK mark
to or delete it from selected clips.
CAfter editing is complete, tap (click) [Save] to
overwrite the metadata.
.
BA C
Keyboard
Done
7Tap (click) [OK] on the confirmation screen.
0Update of the metadata starts.
0After update is complete, “Renewal of clip
metadata is succeeded.” is displayed. Tap
(click) [OK].
0Returns to the screen in step 4.
.
7
OK
Renewal of clip metadata is
succeeded.
Memo :
0If update failed, “Renewal of clip metadata is
failed.” is displayed.
Tap (click) [Close] to return to the screen of step
4.
154 Editing Metadata K
Connecting to the Network K
Uploading a Recording
Clip via a Web Browser
K
0Upload clips recorded in the SD card to a preset
FTP server.
0You can upload selected clips, all clips, or those
appended with an OK mark.
Configuring the FTP Server for
Uploading
(A P148 [Configuring the FTP Server for
Uploading] )
Uploading Video Clips
1Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P150 [Connecting from a Web Browser
K] )
2Display the clip list.
Tap (click) the [Clip List] tab to display the clip
list.
.
2
3Set the camera recorder to the “Remote
Edit Mode”.
You can switch to “Remote Edit Mode” from a
web browser or through operation of the
camera.
oSwitching from a web browser
AYou will see a message indicating “It is
necessary to change the camera mode to
"Remote Edit Mode". Change the mode.”
on the web browser.
.
A
B
ChangeCancel
It is necessary to change the camera
mode to "Remote Edit Mode".
Change the mode.
BTap (click) [Change] to switch the camera
to the Remote Edit mode.
.
Exit
Remote Edit Mode
oSwitching from the camera
A“Change to Remote Edit Mode?” is
displayed on the display screen of the
camera unit.
BSelect [Change] and press the Set button
(R) to switch to the Remote Edit mode.
.
B
A
Exit
Remote Edit Mode
Cancel
Change
Remote Edit Mode?
Change to
Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser K155
Connecting to the Network K
Memo :
0When the menu or status is displayed,
display of the confirmation screen will be
put on hold.
0If the menu is displayed on the camera
recorder, close the menu.
0If the status is displayed on the camera
recorder, close the status display.
0Pressing the Set button (R) on the camera
recorder while in the Remote Edit Mode
ends the Remote Edit Mode forcibly and
switches to the Camera mode.
0When FTP upload via the camera unit is
currently in progress, switching to the
Remote Edit mode is disabled.
4Select the Upload mode.
Select the [Upload] tab.
5Select the clip you want to upload.
0A list of the recorded clips appears on the
[Clip List] screen.
0Tap (click) the clip you want to upload to
select it.
0Clips being selected are indicated by a check
mark.
Memo :
0You can switch the displayed slot using the [Slot
A] and [Slot B] tabs.
0You can use the [J-30] or [K+30] tab to jump to
the previous or next 30 clips on the list.
6Select the upload operation.
Tap (click) the [Actions] button.
.
4
6
5
7Select a method to upload the clips.
.
A
B
C
D
AUpload all clips
Uploads all the clips in the displayed slots.
Tap (click) to move to the [Clip Server]
screen.
BUpload OK clips
Uploads all clips in the displayed slots that
are appended with an OK mark.
Tap (click) to move to the [Clip Server]
screen.
CUpload selected clips
Uploads the clips you have selected.
Tap (click) to move to the [Clip Server]
screen.
DClear all selection
Clears all clip selection and returns to the
[Clip List] screen.
156 Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser K
Connecting to the Network K
8Select the clip server and start uploading.
0Upon selecting the server to upoload clips to,
an upload screen appears.
.
8
0The status of the transfer process is indicated
by a progress bar.
.
Memo :
0To stop transfer, tap (click) the [Stop] button.
Tapping (clicking) [Yes] on the confirmation
screen stops the transfer halfway and brings you
back to the main page.
0If there already exists a file on the FTP server
with a name identical to the file to be transferred,
a confirmation screen asking to overwrite the file
will appear.
However, if “HTTP” is selected in the [Select
FTP Proxy] screen of the network connection
settings, an overwrite confirmation screen does
not appear, and the existing file will be
overwritten directly.
0After uploading in step 8 has started, other web
browser operations are disabled until uploading
is complete.
0After uploading in step 8 has started and upon
shifting to the Media mode by pressing the
[MODE] selection button, operation from the
web browser will be disabled.
To enable web browser operation, press the
[MODE] selection button again to switch to the
Camera mode.
0If a setting other than “FTP” is specified for
[Protocol], to ensure the safety of the
communication path, a screen appears
prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the
public key and certificate received from the
server.
Check to ensure that the displayed value
coincides with the known value.
0Fingerprint is a unique value that varies with
each public key and certificate.
0For details of the fingerprint, please consult
the administrator of the server to be
connected.
(A P122 [ Clip Server ] )
0When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
connections to the servers other than “FTP”
protocol cannot be made.
Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser K157
Connecting to the Network K
9Upload is complete.
0After upload is complete, “Successfully
Completed.” appears on the screen.
.
9
Exit
Successfully Completed.
FTP Upload
0When clips are not uploaded successfully,
the following errors are displayed.
.
Cause of
Error
Exit
Internal Error.
Failed.
FTP Upload
(A P171 [List of FTP Transfer Errors K] )
Memo :
0Follow “[List of FTP Transfer Errors K]
(A P 171)” to clear the error message.
View Remote Feature K
You can access via a web browser on devices such
as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to check
the live image and perform the following remote
control operations.
0Start/stop recording
0Zooming
0Register/delete preset zoom
1Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P150 [Connecting from a Web Browser
K] )
2Tap (click) the [View Remote] tab to open
the [View Remote] screen.
.
2
Operating Procedure
.
26min
26min
50min
50min
01:12:54.19
01:12:54.19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
HM200
HM200
Z 0
Z 0
A
B
D
E
C
F
G
H
I
J
158 Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser K
Connecting to the Network K
APage Switch Tab
Tap (click) this tab to move to the [Planning
Metadata], [Clip Metadata], or [Settings]
screen.
BLive View Screen
Displays the live images.
Tap a live image to display or hide information
that is displayed on the live image, such as
remaining space on the media and time code.
C[Clear] Button
Switches to the Delete Preset Zoom Position
mode.
(A P159 [Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom] )
(A P160 [Deleting a Preset Zoom] )
D[Preset] Button
Switches to the Register Preset Zoom Position
mode.
(A P159 [Registering Preset Zoom] )
E[A]/[B]/[C] Buttons
Use these buttons to perform preset registration
or delete a preset data.
FZoom Control
0Operate the zoom function by dragging the
zoom button along the sliding bar.
0Tap (click) the [Wide] or [Tele] button to fine-
tune the zoom position.
0The slide changes according to the dynamic
zoom.
(A P97 [ Dynamic Zoom ] )
Dynamic Zoom Off:
.
Dynamic Zoom On:
.
GFunction Lock Button
Locks the functions that have been set on the
[Settings] screen.
(A P163 [Changing View Remote Function
Settings] )
Icon Description
.
Locked
.
Not locked
HStop Record Button
IStart Record Button
JCamera Control Function
(A P161 [Camera Control Function K] )
Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom
Registering Preset Zoom
You can register any 3 zoom positions.
1Set to the Register Preset Zoom mode.
Tap (click) the [Preset] button to switch to the
Register Preset Zoom mode.
.
26min
26min
50min
50min
01:12:54.19
01:12:54.19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
HM200
HM200
Z 0
Z 0
2Determine the zoom position.
Use the zoom control to operate the zoom and
determine a position.
3Tap (click) [A].
Position [A] is registered, and position A is
displayed on the sliding bar of the zoom control.
.
26min
26min
50min
50min
01:12:54.19
01:12:54.19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
HM200
HM200
Z 0
Z 0
View Remote Feature K159
Connecting to the Network K
4In the same way, register [B] and [C].
After all three positions A, B and C are
registered, the positions of the [A], [B], and [C]
buttons will be rearranged according to the
order of the registered zoom position from the
left.
.
26min
26min
50min
50min
01:12:54.19
01:12:54.19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
HM200
HM200
Z 0
Z 0
5Exit the Register Preset Zoom mode.
Tap (click) the [Preset] button to exit the
Register Preset Zoom mode.
Memo :
0After registration is complete ([A], [B], and [C]
buttons are all active), tapping (clicking) each
button switches to the corresponding preset
zoom position.
0This function operates independently of the
preset zoom position on the camera recorder.
(A P50 [Saving/Recalling Current Zoom
Position (Preset Zoom)] )
0When the dynamic zoom is on, the preset button
where the dynamic zoom position is registered
grays out when the dynamic zoom is off and the
zoom position cannot be changed.
0When the dynamic zoom is off, the dynamic
zoom position cannot be registered.
Deleting a Preset Zoom
1Set to the Delete Preset Zoom mode.
When any of positions [A], [B], and [C] are
registered, tapping (clicking) the [Clear] button
switches to the Delete Preset Zoom mode.
.
26min
26min
50min
50min
01:12:54.19
01:12:54.19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
HM200
HM200
Z 0
Z 0
2Tap (click) the [A], [B], or [C] button that
corresponds to the position you want to
delete.
0The position is deleted, and the button is
grayed out.
0The corresponding zoom position mark on
the sliding bar also disappears.
.
26min
26min
50min
50min
01:12:54.19
01:12:54.19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
HM200
HM200
Z 0
Z 0
Position mark
disappears
Grayed out
3Exit the Delete Preset Zoom mode.
Tap (click) the [Clear] button to exit the Delete
Preset Zoom mode.
Memo :
0The Clip Review function of the camera recorder
is unavailable during View Remote operation.
(A P73 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately
(Clip Review)] )
160 View Remote Feature K
Connecting to the Network K
Camera Control Function
K
You can control the camera by accessing via a web
browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC.
You can perform the following operations for each
of the items.
.
A
B
C
D
E
F
AREC
For performing recording start or recording
pause operation.
.
BCAMERA
Enables operations related to the camera
functions.
.
.
CZOOM
Enables zooming operations.
.
Camera Control Function K161
Connecting to the Network K
DFOCUS
Enables focusing operations.
.
EUSER SWITCH
You can enable or disable the user buttons that
are assigned with a function.
.
FMENU
You can show or hide the display and menu
characters on an external monitor as well as
operation of menus, switching the display
screen and status display.
.
Configuring Settings via a
Browser K
You can change the network-related settings by
accessing via a web browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
1Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P150 [Connecting from a Web Browser
K] )
2Tap (click) the [Settings] tab.
.
2
3The [Settings] screen appears.
Set each of the items as follows.
.
A
B
C
D
E
162 Camera Control Function K
Connecting to the Network K
AView Remote
Settings for operations on the View Remote.
BConnection Setup
Settings related to the network.
You can change the settings for each of the
preset items on the [Wizard] screen of the
camera recorder.
CMetadata Server
Settings on the server for importing the
metadata.
Setting can be performed in the same way as
the Metadata Server menu on the camera
recorder.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
DClip Server
Settings for the server to upload recorded clips
to.
Setting can be performed in the same way as
the [Clip Server] menu on the camera recorder.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
ELive Streaming
Setting for streaming audio and video via the
network.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
Memo :
0Priority is given to menu operation on the
camera recorder.
0When the menu on the camera recorder is
opened while the [Settings] screen is opened
using a web browser, a warning appears, after
which the display returns to the main screen.
0While the menu is displayed on the camera
recorder, the [Settings] screen cannot be
opened via the web browser.
Changing View Remote Function
Settings
For performing setting for using the View Remote
function.
.
A
B
C
A[Camera Name]
0For setting the name that appears at the top
left of the view screen.
0Tapping the text input area displays a
software keyboard.
If you are using a PC, enter using the PC
keyboard.
0By tapping the Go key after input is complete,
the software keyboard disappears.
B[Restrictions]
For setting the buttons to be disabled on the
View screen while in the locked mode.
0[REC]:
For setting whether to disable the Stop
Record button, zoom operation, and camera
control during recording.
Tap (click) each item to switch between
[Unlock] and [Lock].
0[Except REC]:
For setting whether to disable the record
button, zoom operation, and camera control
in any mode other than the recording mode.
Tap (click) each item to switch between
[Unlock] and [Lock].
C[Save]/[Cancel]
Tap (click) [Save] to save the settings.
Tap (click) [Cancel] to stop setting and return to
the main [Settings] screen.
Configuring Settings via a Browser K163
Connecting to the Network K
Changing Connection Setup
You can change the settings for each of the preset
items on the [Wizard] screen of the camera
recorder.
0If all the items cannot be displayed in a single
page, scroll down to display the remaining
items.
0Items that cannot be changed are grayed out
according to the type of adapter connected and
the mode of connection.
.
A
D
C
B
AType of Adapter Connected
BMode of Wireless LAN Connection
C[Search Access Point] Button
Tap (click) to display a list of the detected
access points.
The currently selected access point is indicated
by a dot mark ( 0 ).
.
Cancel
Search Access Point
DSettings on the [Select Setup Type] Screen
.
E
ESettings on the [IP Address Configuration]
Screen
When “DHCP” is selected, all items will be
grayed out.
.
F
G
H
FSettings when using cellular adapter
GSettings on the [Select FTP Proxy] Screen
H[OK]/[Cancel] Button
After changing of settings is complete, tap
(click) the [OK] button.
On the confirmation screen, tap (click)
[Execute] to change the settings on the camera
recorder and restart the network.
164 Configuring Settings via a Browser K
Connecting to the Network K
Changing Metadata Server Settings
You can make direct changes to the FTP server for
importing the metadata set in [Main Menu] B
[System] B [Network]/[Settings] B [Metadata
Server], as well as the path of the file to import.
(A P121 [ Metadata Server ] )
Changing Clip Server Settings
You can make direct changes to the server and
directory settings that are specified in [Main
Menu] B [System] B [Network]/[Settings] B [Clip
Server] for uploading recorded clips in the SD card
to the FTP server.
(A P122 [ Clip Server ] )
Changing Streaming Settings
You can make direct changes to settings that are
specified in [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Live Streaming Set], such as
information on the destination of distribution.
(A P118 [ Live Streaming Set ] )
Managing the Network
Connection Settings File
K
This camera recorder allows you to save the
network connection settings on the Wizard screen
to the camera recorder unit.
Loading a saved connecting settings file enables
you to reproduce the appropriate network
connection state speedily.
Memo :
0To save or load the connection settings, go to
[Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]/[Settings]
B [Connection Setup].
0The following operations can be performed on
the [Connection Setup] menu.
0[Saving the Connection Settings File]
(A P 165)
0[Reading the Connection Settings File]
(A P 166)
0[Deleting Connection Settings] (A P 167)
Number of Storable Setup Files
Camera recorder : [CAM1] to [CAM4]
Saving the Connection Settings File
1Select [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Network]/[Settings] B [Connection Setup]
and press the Set button (R).
2Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).
.
2
Delete
Store
Load
Wizard
Connection Setup
3Select the file to be newly saved (or
overwritten) using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
.
3
<no file>
CAM4
CAM3
CAM2
CAM1
Store Connection Setup
4Name the file.
Enter the subname using the software
keyboard.
(A P94 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
Memo :
0When overwriting an existing file, the subname
of the existing file is displayed.
0Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or
press the [CANCEL] button to return to the
previous screen.
Configuring Settings via a Browser K165
Connecting to the Network K
5Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).
.
5
4
6Save the file.
0A confirmation screen appears when you
choose to overwrite.
Select [Overwrite] on the confirmation
screen, and press the Set button (R). Saving
starts, and “Storing...” appears on the screen.
.
:KAMAKURA
6
Cancel
Overwrite
CAM3
Setup?
Overwrite Connection
0Saving starts, and “Storing...” appears on the
screen when the file is newly saved.
.
Storing...
7Saving is complete.
After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
Reading the Connection Settings File
1Select [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Network]/[Settings] B [Connection Setup]
and press the Set button (R).
2Select [Load] and press the Set button (R).
.
2
Delete
Store
Load
Wizard
Connection Setup
3Select the file to read using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
.
3
CAM3
CAM2
CAM1
Store Connection Setup
4Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears on the
screen.
.
:YOKOHAMA
4
Cancel
Load
CAM2
Setup?
Load Connection
5Reading is complete.
After reading of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
166 Managing the Network Connection Settings File K
Connecting to the Network K
Deleting Connection Settings
1Select [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Network]/[Settings] B [Connection Setup]
and press the Set button (R).
2Select [Delete] and press the Set button
(R).
.
2
Delete
Store
Load
Wizard
Connection Setup
3Select the file to delete using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
.
3
CAM3
CAM2
CAM1
Delete Connection Setup
4Select [Delete] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Deletion starts, and “Deleting...” appears on the
screen.
.
:TOKYO
4
Cancel
Delete
CAM1
Setup?
Delete Connection
5Deletion is complete.
After file deletion is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen.
Performing Live
Streaming K
By combining with the decoder or PC application
that supports live streaming, you can perform audio
and video streaming via the network.
Supported Formats
Video
H.264
01920x1080 / 60i (12.0 Mbps), 60i (8.0 Mbps), 60i
(5.0 Mbps), 60i (3.0 Mbps), 50i (12.0 Mbps), 50i
(8.0 Mbps), 50i (5.0 Mbps), 50i (3.0 Mbps)
01280x720 / 30p (8.0 Mbps), 30p (5.0 Mbps), 30p
(3.0 Mbps), 30p (1.5 Mbps), 25p (8.0 Mbps),
25p (5.0 Mbps), 25p (3.0 Mbps), 25p (1.5 Mbps)
0720x480 / 60i (8.0 Mbps), 60i (5.0 Mbps), 60i
(3.0 Mbps), 60i (1.5 Mbps), 60i (0.8 Mbps), 60i
(0.3 Mbps), 60i (0.2 Mbps)
0720x576 / 50i (8.0 Mbps), 50i (5.0 Mbps), 50i
(3.0 Mbps), 50i (1.5 Mbps), 50i (0.8 Mbps), 50i
(0.3 Mbps), 50i (0.2 Mbps)
0480x270 / 30p (0.2 Mbps), 25p (0.2 Mbps)
Memo :
0The following constraints apply depending on
the setting of [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Network]/[Settings] B [Live Streaming Set] B
[Type].
0An encoding bit rate exceeding 8.0 Mbps
cannot be selected when [Type] is set to
“RTSP/RTP”.
0An encoding bit rate exceeding 5.0 Mbps
cannot be selected when [Type] is set to
“ZIXI” and [Latency] is set to other than
“Low”, or when [Type] is set to “RTMP”.
0An encoding bit rate exceeding 3.0 Mbps
cannot be selected when [Type] is set to
“ZIXI” and [Latency] is set to “Low”.
(A P119 [ Type ] )
0Depending on the type of network adapter
used and the connection, the images and
audio sound during live streaming can be
choppy.
Audio
AAC
Managing the Network Connection Settings File K167
Connecting to the Network K
Supported Protocols
Network protocols : TCP, UDP
Transport mode : MPEG2-TS,
RTSP/RTP, ZIXI,
RTMP
Setting Distribution
1Set the [Record Format] according to the
resolution and frame rate of the video to be
distributed.
For details on the [Record Format] settings,
please refer to [Combinations of [Record
Format] and [Live Streaming Set] that Support
Transmission] (A P 168).
Memo :
0Live streaming cannot be performed in the
following cases.
0[Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set] B
[Record Format] B [System] set to “4K” or
“HD+Web”.
0[Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set] B
[Record Format] B [WFrame Rate] set to
“24p”, or [WBit Rate] set to “50M(YUV422)”.
2Set the Resolution and Frame & Bit Rate for
the video to be distributed.
Specify the settings in [Main Menu] B [System]
B [Network]/[Settings] B [Live Streaming Set].
(A P118 [ Live Streaming Set ] )
3Specify the distribution protocol and
related items.
Specify the distribution protocol and related
items in [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Live Streaming Set] B [Streaming
Server].
(A P119 [ Streaming Server ] )
4Select the server for live streaming.
Select the transmission server in [Main Menu]
B [System] B [Network]/[Settings] B [Live
Streaming Set] B [Server].
Combinations of [Record Format] and [Live Streaming Set] that Support Transmission
Record Format Live Streaming Set (Resolution, Frame Rate)
System Resolution Frame Rate Bit Rate 1920x1080,
60i/50i
1280x720,
30p/25p
720x480/
720x576,
60i/50i
480x270,
30p/25p
4K - - - b b b b
HD 1920x1080 60p/50p 50M (XHQ) c c c c
50M (YUV422) b b b b
60i/50i 50M (XHQ)/
35M (UHQ) c b c c
50M (YUV422) b b b b
30p/25p 50M (XHQ)/
35M (UHQ) c c c c
50M (YUV422) b b b b
24p - b b b b
1280x720 60p/50p/30p/25p - b c c c
SD - - - b b c c
HD+Web - - - b b b b
*c: Supported; b: Not supported
168 Performing Live Streaming K
Connecting to the Network K
Starting Distribution
1Perform the necessary setting for the
decoder and PC application.
For details on the settings, please refer to the
instruction manual of the respective devices
and applications.
Memo :
0If there is an NAT router within the
communication path between the camera and
the decoder, port forwarding setup is required.
For details on the settings, please refer to the
instruction manual of the router in use.
0The following parameters are required when
connecting to this camera recorder using the
RTSP/RTP.
Port number: 554
Stream ID: stream
0Use the following to access via URL.
rtsp://<IP address of the camera recorder>:554/
stream
2With the network connection established,
set [Live Streaming] to “On”.
(A P142 [Preparing Network Connection K] )
0Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Live Streaming Set] B [Live
Streaming] to “On”.
0The network connection mark appears on the
display screen when a network connection is
established.
.
100min
50min
282min
3840x2160
30p 150M
1/100
F1 . 6
18dB
AE+6
ND 1 / 1 6
12 : 34 : 56
Jan 24 , 2015
00: 00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P 15 00 0K
Memo :
0You can also assign “Live Streaming” to a user
button.
(A P39 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
0You can view the status of distribution on the
LCD monitor.
(A P131 [Live streaming mark K] )
Icon Status
.
(Red)
Distribution in progress (good
connection quality)
Blinks when distribution starts or
stops
.
(Red)
Distribution in progress (poor
connection quality)
.
(Yellow)
Waiting for connection (during
RTSP/RTP) or connection failed
0When the 5 icon is displayed, you can view the
details of the error on the [Network] screen of the
status screen.
.
Cause of Error
192.168.0.1
HM200
P2P
MAC Address
IP Address
Passphrase
Security Type
SSID
Ty p e
Network
Live Streaming
WPA2
Multicast Is Not Supported.
(A P173 [List of Live Streaming Error Displays
K] )
Caution :
0Streaming may be interrupted temporarily 24
hours after the process started.
Performing Live Streaming K169
Connecting to the Network K
Error Messages and Actions
Warning display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen, tally lamp indication and warning tone are as
follows according to the error status.
Memo :
0This camera recorder makes use of a microcomputer. Noise interference from external sources may
prevent it from functioning properly. When this occurs, turn off and on the power of the camera recorder
again.
Error Message Status Action
Turn Power Off Turn Back On
Later
System error.
* The warning tone sounds and the
tally lamp blinks twice every
second.
Turn off the power, and turn it on
again.
If the error persists, please contact
the local dealers in your area.
Fan Stop Detected Please
Turn P.Off
0The fan stopped running. Please contact the local dealers in
your area.
Fan Maintenance Required Usage time of the fan has exceeded
9000 hours.
Check the fan and replace
accordingly. For more details,
please contact the local dealers in
your area.
Memo :
0You can check the usage time of
the fan in [System] B [System
Information] B [Fan Hour].
(A P114 [ Fan Hour ] )
Getting Overheated.　 Please
Turn Power Off.
0The battery has exceeded the
specified temperature.
0The power turns off
automatically after about 15
second.
0Wait until the temperature drops
or replace the battery.
0If the error persists, please
contact the local dealers in your
area.
Rec Inhibited [REC] button is pressed when the
write-protect switch of the SD card
is set.
Turn off the write-protect switch of
the SD card, or insert a recordable
SD card.
(A P40 [SD Card] )
Lost Media Info * 0Card is removed while recording
is in progress.
0Card is removed while
formatting is in progress.
0Card is removed while restoring
is in progress.
0Card is removed while adding
the OK mark.
0Card is removed while writing a
setup file.
0Card is removed while deleting a
clip.
(*: A, B)
Restore the card using this camera
recorder.
(A P43 [Restoring the SD Card] )
170 Error Messages and Actions
Others
Error Message Status Action
Record Format Incorrect 0The video format of the file for
Clip Review is different from the
current [WResolution],
[WFrame Rate], or [WBit Rate]
setting.
Set [WResolution], [WFrame Rate]
and [WBit Rate] correctly.
(A P115 [ W Resolution ] )
(A P115 [ W Frame Rate ] )
(A P115 [ W Bit Rate ] )
Media Full 0[REC] button is pressed when
the media in use has no
remaining space.
0Remaining space ran out during
recording.
Replace the SD card with a new
one.
No Clips No viewable clips are found on the
card for Clip Review.
Insert an SD card that contains clips
that can be reviewed.
(A P40 [SD Card] )
(A P73 [Viewing Recorded
Videos Immediately (Clip
Review)] )
No Media [REC] button is pressed when an SD
card is not inserted.
Insert an SD card.
(A P40 [SD Card] )
No Media No SD card is found in Media mode
or when the thumbnail screen is
displayed.
Insert an SD card.
(A P40 [SD Card] )
No Clips No clips are found on the inserted
SD card in Media mode or when the
thumbnail screen is displayed.
Insert an SD card that contains
playable clips.
(A P40 [SD Card] )
(A P83 [Playing Recorded
Clips] )
12h Continuation Record The continuous recording time in
AVCHD mode exceeds 12 hours
and recording stops automatically.
To continue recording, press the
[REC] button again.
List of FTP Transfer Errors K
If the upload of a recorded clip or download of the metadata setup file (XML format) is not successfully
completed, the following errors are displayed.
Error message Status Action
Timeout. Transfer was discontinued due to
timeout caused by network
transmission or server failure.
0Execute again.
0Use a different server.
Media Was Removed. SD card is removed while FTP
transfer is in progress.
Insert the SD card and execute FTP
transfer again.
Adapter Was Removed. The USB network device is
removed while FTP transfer is in
progress.
Connect the USB network device.
Cannot Connect to Server. Unable to connect to the FTP server. Adjust the Server and Port settings
for [Metadata Server] or [Clip
Server].
(A P121 [ Metadata Server ] )
(A P122 [ Clip Server ] )
Error Messages and Actions 171
Others
Error message Status Action
Access Denied. Access is denied. Adjust the Server and Port settings
for [Metadata Server] or [Clip
Server].
(A P121 [ Metadata Server ] )
(A P122 [ Clip Server ] )
Invalid Username or
Password.
Authentication for login to the FTP
server failed.
Adjust the Username and Password
settings for [Metadata Server] or
[Clip Server].
(A P121 [ Metadata Server ] )
(A P122 [ Clip Server ] )
Invalid Path Was Requested. The path specified for the FTP
server is incorrect.
Adjust the [Clip Server] and [Dir.
Path] settings for [Metadata
Server] or [File Path].
(A P121 [ Metadata Server ] )
(A P122 [ Clip Server ] )
Server Error. There was an unintended operation
of the FTP server.
Execute again.
Use a different server.
Invalid Request. A bad request is executed for the
FTP server.
Execute again.
Invalid Data Size. Invalid data size, such as a planning
metadata size that exceeds 4 KB.
Adjust the planning metadata saved
in the [Metadata Server].
(A P151 [ Planning Metadata ] )
Invalid Data Format. The XML format of the planning
metadata is invalid.
Adjust the planning metadata saved
in the [Metadata Server].
(A P151 [ Planning Metadata ] )
Transfer Error. Transfer failed due to
communication failure.
Execute again.
Invalid URL. The path was deemed invalid by the
FTP server.
Adjust the Server and Port settings
for [Metadata Server] or [Clip
Server].
(A P121 [ Metadata Server ] )
(A P122 [ Clip Server ] )
Media Access Error. Reading/writing of the SD card
failed while FTP transfer is in
progress.
Insert a different SD card.
Internal Error. An internal error has occurred while
FTP transfer is in progress.
Adjust the settings and execute
again.
Other Error. An unknown error or other errors
have occurred while FTP transfer is
in progress.
Adjust the settings and execute
again.
Media Read Error. Reading of the SD card failed while
FTP transfer is in progress.
Insert a different SD card.
172 Error Messages and Actions
Others
List of Live Streaming Error Displays K
The following error messages are displayed when the live streaming setting is incorrect, or when the
connection is lost during live streaming.
Error message Status Action
Invalid Address. 0The IP address format is
incorrect.
0The domain name cannot be
converted into the IP address.
0Enter the IP address, host name
or URL of the destination
correctly.
(A P168 [Setting Distribution] )
Multicast Is Not Supported. An IP multicast address was set. Use an IP address that is not a
multicast address.
Cannot Connect to Receiver. Establishment of connection with
TCP failed.
0Ensure that the recipient’s
device is set to TCP.
0Set Type to “MPEG2-TS/UDP”.
(A P168 [Setting Distribution] )
TCP Disconnected. TCP connection is lost. Check to ensure that there is no
abnormality in the decoder, or
network connection device and
cables, followed by establishing the
connection again.
Not Enough Bandwidth. 0The communication bandwidth
is narrower than the average bit
rate.
0The network bandwidth is
insufficient, and packets are
discarded.
0Lower the resolution/picture
quality of the video to be
distributed.
0Consider switching to the use of
a stable network, such as wired
LAN.
Connection Timeout Timeout for connection via ZIXI. Set [Destination Address] and
[Destination Port] correctly.
(A P168 [Setting Distribution] )
Authorization Failed Authentication of connection via
ZIXI failed.
Set [Stream ID] and [Password]
correctly.
(A P168 [Setting Distribution] )
Connection Error Connection via “ZIXI” or “RTMP”
failed.
0Check whether a different
camera with an identical stream
ID is connected.
0Set [Destination URL] and
[Stream Key] correctly.
(A P119 [ Destination URL ] )
(A P119 [ Stream Key ] )
Disconnected “ZIXI” or “RTMP” connection is lost. Check whether there is abnormality
with the network connection device,
cables, etc., and try to re-establish
the connection.
Error Messages and Actions 173
Others
Blinking of the Tally Lamp
The tally lamp start blinking when the remaining space on the SD card is running out during recording, or
when the battery power is running low.
Blinking Mode Remaining Battery Power/SD Card Space
Blinks slowly
(once every second)
0Battery power is low
0Remaining recording time on SD card is less than 3 minutes (during
recording)
0When a malfunction occurred during live streaming K
Blinks quickly
(2 times per second)
0Remaining battery power is almost zero
0Remaining recording time on SD card is zero (during recording)
0Error on the camera recorder
Warning Tone
0Warning tone is output from the monitor speaker and [x] terminal when the battery level is low.
0Warning tone is also output when an error occurs in the camera recorder.
Memo :
0You can specify whether to turn on the warning tone as well as setting the volume in [A/V Set] B [Audio
Set] B [Alarm Level].
(A P112 [ Alarm Level ] )
Troubleshooting
Symptom Action
Power does not turn on. 0Is the AC adapter properly connected?
0Is the battery charged?
0Is the power turned on immediately after it is turned off?
Make sure to wait for an interval of at least 5 seconds before turning
on the power again.
Unable to start recording. 0Is the record trigger button/lock switch on the handle turned on? O
0Is the write-protect switch of the SD card turned on?
Make sure that the write-protect switch is turned off.
(A P40 [Write-Protect Switch on the SD Card] )
0Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode?
Use the [MODE] selection button to switch to the Camera mode.
(A P18 [Operation Modes] )
0Is the SD card inserted compatible with the recording format?
(A P48 [Selecting a Video Format] )
(A P117 [ 4GB File Spanning(SDXC) ] )
Camera image is not output on
the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen.
0Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode?
Use the [MODE] selection button to switch to the Camera mode.
(A P18 [Operation Modes] )
Playback does not start after
selecting a clip thumbnail and
pressing the Set button (R).
0Is the selected clip a playable clip?
Playback is not possible if the clip has a different video format setting.
Images on the LCD monitor
and viewfinder screen appear
dark or blurred.
0Readjust the brightness of the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
0Is the [ND FILTER] switch set to “1/16”?
0Is the iris closed?
0Is the shutter speed setting too high?
0Is the amount of peaking too little? Use the [LCD/VF Peaking] menu
to adjust the contour for the LCD monitor image and viewfinder image
by adjusting the contour of the viewfinder image.
(The contour of the LCD monitor will also be adjusted at the same
time.)
Adjust using [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [LCD/VF Peaking].
(A P37 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor] )
(A P38 [Adjusting the Viewfinder] )
174 Error Messages and Actions
Others
Symptom Action
The [CH1/CH2] recording level
adjustment knob does not
work. O
0Is the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] switch set to “AUTO”?
0Is Full Auto enabled?
Is [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Audio On FULL AUTO] set to “Auto” in
Full Auto mode?
(A P112 [ Audio On FULL AUTO ] )
SD card cannot be initialized
(formatted).
0Is the write-protect switch of the SD card turned on?
Make sure that the write-protect switch is turned off.
(A P40 [Write-Protect Switch on the SD Card] )
Battery alarm appears even
after loading a charged
battery.
0Is the battery too old?
The time code and user’s bit
are not displayed.
0Even in Camera mode or Media mode, the time code and user’s bit
may not be displayed depending to the type of display.
0Is [LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [TC/UB] set to “Off”? To display
the time code or user’s bit, set it to “TC” or “UB”.
(A P107 [ TC/UB ] )
The date and time are not
displayed.
0The date and time are only displayed on the Display 1 and Display 2
screens in the Camera mode (during shooting).
(A P127 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )
0Is [System] B [Record Set] B [Time Stamp] set to “On”? To display
the date and time, set it to “Off”.
(A P117 [ Time Stamp ] )
Incorrect display on the
viewfinder.
0Is [LCD/VF] B [VF SW] set to “Enable”, and is the viewfinder in use
without being pulled out?
To use the viewfinder in this setting, pull out the viewfinder.
(A P104 [ VF SW ] )
The actual recording time is
shorter than the estimated
time.
0The recordable time may be shorter depending on the shooting
conditions or the subject.
Cannot connect to wireless
LAN. K
0Check the mode of connection and method of setting ([SSID] and
[Passphrase] in cases other than WPS).
(A P143 [Connecting via Wireless LAN] )
0Even if the Passphrase is wrong, “Completed the Setup Wizard.
Please Input the Passphrase into Your Device.” may appear at the
browser setting depending on the type of encryption.
Adjust [Passphrase] again.
The View Remote screen turns
black.
The screen flickers.
The screen freezes.
Cannot perform remote
operation. K
0The network path is congested.
Wait a while before refreshing (reloading) the web browser.
The clips cannot be uploaded
to the FTP server. K
0Adjust the [Clip Server] settings.
(A P122 [ Clip Server ] )
0The maximum size of the recorded clip is 64 GB.
If a file size limit is set in the FTP server settings, set the size limit to
more than 64 GB.
0Take necessary action as described in “[List of FTP Transfer Errors
K] (A P 171)”.
The wireless LAN is
disconnected. K
0The wireless LAN may be disconnected depending on the
environment. Change the usage environment.
0Connect via wired LAN.
(A P145 [Connecting via Wired LAN] )
The images and audio sound
during live streaming are
choppy. K
0Depending on the type of network adapter used and the connection,
streaming may not be possible with the encoding bit rate specified.
Please reduce the encoding bit rate.
Troubleshooting 175
Others
Specifications
General
Item Description
Power DC 12 V
Power
consumption
K
0Approx. 7.9 W (*1)
0Approx. 7.3 W (*2)
M
0Approx. 7.6 W (*1)
0Approx. 6.7 W (*2)
Mass K
0Approx. 1.6 kg (with battery)
M
0Approx. 1.2 kg (with battery)
Allowable
operating
temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Allowable
operating
humidity
30 %RH to 80 %RH
Allowable
storage
temperature
-20 °C to 50 °C (-4 °F to 122 °F)
Dimensions (W
× H × D)
K
0149 mm × 191 mm × 307 mm
(including handle unit)
M
0149 mm × 112 mm × 307 mm
*1 When [System] is set to “4K” and all other
settings are in factory default
*2 When [System] is set to “HD” and all other
settings are in factory default
Terminal Section
Item Description
[SDI OUT] terminal (480i or 576i: Downconverted
720p/1080i/1080p: embedded audio), BNC
(unbalanced) K
3G-SDI Compliant with SMPTE ST424
HD-SDI Compliant with SMPTE ST292
SD-SDI Compliant with SMPTE ST259
[INPUT1/INPUT2] terminal O
[LINE] +4 dBu, 10 kK, XLR (balanced)
[MIC] -50 dBu, 4 kK, XLR (balanced),
+48 V output (phantom power
supply)
[AUX] terminal Φ3.5 mm stereo mini jack
-22 dBu 10 kK
[AV] terminal Φ3.5 mm 4-pin mini jack
Video signal 1.0 V (p-p)
Audio signal -8 dBu (during reference level
input), 1 kK (unbalanced)
Item Description
[x] terminal Φ3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Output -18 dBu, 16 K load (reference
level at -20 dBFS, and at
maximum headphone volume)
[REMOTE]
terminal
Φ2.5 mm stereo mini jack
[U] terminal
[DEVICE] Mini USB-B type, USB 2.0,
miniB, slave function (mass
storage class) only
[HOST] KUSB-A type, USB2.0, network
connection function only
Lens Section
Item Description
Lens F1.2, 12x, f= 4.67 mm to
56.04 mm
(35 mm equivalent: 29.6 mm to
355 mm)
Filter diameter Φ62 mm
Camera Section
Item Description
Image pickup
device
1/2.5-inch Progressive CMOS
Sync system Internal sync (built-in SSG)
Optical filter OFF, 1/4, 1/16
Gain 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB,
15dB, 18dB, 21dB, 24dB, Lolux
(30dB, 36dB), AGC
Electronic
shutter
1/6 to 1/10000, EEI
LCD monitor 3.5-inch LCD, 16:9 920K pixels
Viewfinder 0.24-inch LCOS, 16:9 1.56M
pixels (960 x 540 x 3)
Storage Section
Item Description
Supported
media
SDHC/SDXC
Slots x 2
176 Specifications
Others
Video/Audio
Item Description
Recording time Approx. 25 minutes (8 GB SD
card, 35 Mbps, VBR mode)
4K mode
Recording file
format
QuickTime File Format
Video
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 150 Mbps
(Max) 3840x2160/30p, 25p, 24p
Audio LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
HD mode (QuickTime)
Recording file
format
QuickTime File Format
Video
YUV422
mode,
XHQ mode
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 50 Mbps
(Max) 1920x1080/59.94p, 59.94i,
29.97p, 23.98p, 50p, 50i, 25p
UHQ Mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 35 Mbps
(Max) 1920x1080/59.94i, 30p,
23.98p, 50i, 25p
1280×720/60p, 50p
Audio LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
HD mode (AVCHD)
Recording file
format
AVCHD File Format
Video
HQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 28 Mbps
(Max) 1920x1080/60p, 50p
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 24 Mbps
(Max) 1920x1080/59.94i, 50i
SP mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 17 Mbps
1920x1080/59.94i, 50i
Audio Dolby Digital 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit,
256 kbps
SD mode (QuickTime)
Recording file
format
QuickTime File Format
Video MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 8 Mbps
720x480/59.94i (U model only),
720x576/50i (E model only)
Audio LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
SD mode (AVCHD)
Recording file
format
AVCHD File Format
Video MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 8 Mbps
720x480/59.94i (U model only),
720x576/50i (E model only)
Audio Dolby Digital 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit,
256 kbps
Item Description
Web mode (QuickTime)
Recording file
format
QuickTime File Format
Video
Mode other
than HQ,
LP
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 8 Mbps
720x480/59.94i, 720x576/50i
HQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 3 Mbps
960x540/29.97p, 23.98p, 25p
LP mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 1.2 Mbps
480x270/29.97p, 23.98p, 25p
Audio
Mode other
than HQ,
LP
LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
HQ mode,
LP mode
μ-law 2ch 16 kHz
Web mode (AVCHD)
Recording file
format
AVCHD File Format
Video
Mode other
than LP, EP
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 8 Mbps
720x480/59.94i, 720x576/50i
LP mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 9 Mbps
1440x1080/59.94i, 50i
EP mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 5 Mbps
1440x1080/59.94i, 50i
Audio Dolby Digital 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit,
256 kbps
Streaming Mode
K
1920x1080 (60i/50i) Audio AAC
128 k 12/8/5/3 Mbps
1280x720 (30p/25p) Audio AAC
128 k 8/5/3/1.5 Mbps
720x480 (60i) 720x576 (50i)
Audio AAC 128 k/64 k/32 k
8/5/3/1.5/0.8/0.3/0.2 Mbps
480x270 (30p/25p) Audio AAC
32 k 0.2 Mbps
Accessories
Accessories
Warranty Card (U model only) 1
INSTRUCTIONS (BASIC) 1
Document Disc 1
AC Adapter 1
Power Cord (U model: 1, E model: 2)
Battery 1
Handle Unit K1
Hood 1
* Eyepiece and lens cap are attached to the
camera recorder.
Specifications 177
Others
Dimensional Outline Drawing (Unit: mm)
GY-HM200U/GY-HM200E
.
307149
207
197
245
62
(HOOD)
40
134
90
191
52.5 59
178 Specifications
Others
GY-HM170U/GY-HM170E
.
307149
197
245
62
(HOOD)
134
90
112
52.5 59
* The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement
without prior notice.
Specifications 179
Others
Index
AAC adapter .......................................... 29, 31
Access point ............................................ 143
Action ........................................................ 85
AF assist .............................................. 51, 97
Aspect ratio ................................................ 49
BBackup rec ................................................ 76
Battery ................................................. 14, 29
Brightness adjustment ............................... 54
CCamera control function ........................... 161
Camera mode .............................. 19, 35, 127
Cellular adapter ....................................... 145
Charging time ............................................ 30
Clip continuous rec .................................... 79
Clip cutter trig (splitting clips) ..................... 82
Clip name ............................................. 44, 84
Clip review ................................................. 73
Color bar .................................................. 135
Computer ................................................. 140
Connection settings file ............................ 165
Continuous operating time ......................... 30
DDeleting clips ............................................. 87
Display screen ........................... 35, 127, 132
Dual rec ..................................................... 74
Dynamic zoom ..................................... 49, 97
EElectronic shutter ....................................... 58
Error message ................................... 63, 170
Expanded focus ......................................... 52
External monitor ....................................... 138
FFace detection ........................................... 53
Favorites menu ........................................ 123
FAW (Full Auto White Balance) ..... 60, 97, 99
File format .................................................. 47
Focus ......................................................... 50
Focus assist ............................................... 52
Formatting (initializing) SD cards ............... 42
Frame rec .................................................. 80
FTP server ................................. 86, 146, 148
GGain adjustment ........................................ 57
HHeadphone ........................................ 67, 139
IImage stabilizer .......................................... 64
Initial settings ............................................. 33
Interval rec ................................................. 81
Iris adjustment ........................................... 55
LLCD monitor ............................. 16, 31, 35, 37
Lens cover ................................................. 28
Live streaming ......................................... 167
MMarker display ......................................... 135
Media mode ................................. 19, 35, 132
Menu .............................................. 92, 93, 95
Metadata .......................................... 146, 151
NND filter ...................................................... 59
Network ........................................... 130, 142
Network operating environment ............... 142
OOK mark .................................................... 88
One push auto focus .................................. 50
Operation lock ........................................... 45
PP2P .......................................................... 144
Picture quality setting ................................. 64
Power .................................................. 31, 32
Pre rec ....................................................... 78
Preset zoom (browser) ............................ 159
Preset zoom (camera) ............................... 50
Push auto focus ......................................... 51
RRecordable time ........................................ 40
Recording simultaneously at two different
definitions .................................................. 74
Remote edit mode ............................... 19, 36
Resolution .................................................. 47
Restoring SD card ..................................... 43
SSafety zone display .................................. 135
SD/SDHC/SDXC card ......................... 15, 40
SDI ................................................... 109, 138
Selecting multiple clips .............................. 89
Series rec .................................................. 74
Setting the date/time .................................. 34
Setup file .................................................. 136
Shooting .................................................... 46
Software keyboard ..................................... 94
Status screen ..................................... 36, 134
Switching shutter speed ............................ 58
TTally lamp .......................................... 39, 174
Thumbnail (detailed screen) ...................... 85
Thumbnail (standard screen) ..................... 83
Thumbnail screen ...................................... 83
Time code ............................................ 68, 69
Time code generator ................................. 69
Time code playback ................................... 87
180 Index
Others
Trimming .................................................... 91
UUSB mode ................................... 19, 36, 140
User button ................................................ 39
User’s bit .................................................... 68
VVideo format .............................................. 47
View remote ............................................. 158
Viewfinder ................................ 16, 31, 35, 38
WWarning ............................................. 36, 174
Web browser ............................ 150, 155, 162
White balance adjustment ......................... 60
White paint ................................................. 63
Wired LAN ............................................... 145
Wired remote control ............................... 140
Wireless LAN ........................................... 143
ZZebra pattern ............................................. 72
Zoom ......................................................... 49
Symbol
4K ...................................................... 47, 115
Index 181
Others
Software License
Agreement
The software embedded in the Product (hereinafter
the “Licensed Software”) provided by
JVC KENWOOD Corporation (hereinafter the
“Licensor”) is copyrighted to or sublicensable by the
Licensor, and this Agreement provides for the terms
and conditions which Users shall follow in order to
use the Licensed Software. The User shall use the
Licensed Software by agreeing with the terms of this
Software License Agreement. This Agreement shall
be deemed completed at the time the User
(hereinafter the “User”) initially used the Product in
which the “Licensed Software” is embedded.
The Licensed Software may include the software
which has been licensed to the Licensor directly or
indirectly from any third party. In such case, some
third parties require the Users to follow their
conditions for use separately from this Software
License Agreement. Such software shall not be
subject to this Agreement, and the Users are urged
to read the “[Important Notice concerning the
Software] (A P 183)” to be provided separately.
Article 1 General Provision
The Licensor shall grant to the User a non-exclusive
and non-transferable (other than the exceptional
case referred to in Article 3, Paragraph 1) licensed
to use the Licensed Software within the country of
the User (the country where the User bought the
Product (hereinafter the “Country”)).
Article 2 License
1. The license granted under this Agreement shall be
the right to use the Licensed Software in the Product.
2. The User shall not duplicate, copy, modify, add,
translate or otherwise alter, or lease the Licensed
Software and any related documents, whether in
whole or in part.
3. The use of the Licensed Software shall be limited
to personal purpose, and the Licensed Software
shall not be distributed, licensed or sub-licensed
whether it is for commercial purpose or not.
4. The User shall use the Licensed Software
according to the directions described in the
operation manual or help file, and is prohibited to use
or duplicate any data in a manner violating the
Copyright Law or any other laws and regulations by
applying whole or a part of the Licensed Software.
Article 3 Conditions for Grant of License
1. When the User transfers the Product, it may also
transfer the license to use the Licensed Software
embedded in the Product (including any related
materials, updates and upgrades) on condition that
no original, copies or related materials continue in
the possession of the User, and that the User shall
cause the transferee to comply with this Software
License Agreement.
2. The User shall not carry out reverse engineering,
disassembling, decompiling or any other code
analysis works in connection with the Licensed
Software.
Article 4 Right pertaining to the Licensed
Software
1. Any and all copyrights and other rights pertaining
to the Licensed Software and related documents
shall belong to the Licensor or the original holder of
the right who granted to the Licensor the license or
sublicense for the Licensed Software (hereinafter
the “Original Rightholder”), and the User shall not be
entitled to any right other than the license granted
hereunder, in respect of the Licensed Software and
any related documents.
2. The User shall, whenever the User uses the
Licensed Software, comply with any laws relating to
the copyright and other intellectual property rights.
Article 5 Indemnification of Licensor
1. Neither the Licensor nor the Original Rightholder
shall be liable for any damage incurred by the User
or any third party due to the exercise of the license
granted to the User under this Agreement, unless
otherwise restricted by law.
2. The Licensor will offer no guarantee for the
merchantability, convertibility and consistency with
certain objective of the Licensed Software.
Article 6 Liability to Third Party
If any dispute has arisen with any third party due to
an infringement upon a copyright, patent or any other
intellectual property right that was caused by the
User’s use of the Licensed Software, the User shall
settle such dispute at the User’s own cost and hold
the Licensor and the Original Rightholder harmless
from any inconvenience it may cause.
Article 7 Confidentiality
The User shall keep the confidentiality of such
portion of the Licensed Software, related documents
thereof or any other information to be granted under
this Agreement, as well as the conditions of this
Agreement as has not yet entered the public domain,
and shall not disclose or divulge the same to any third
party without approval of the Licensor.
Article 8 Termination
In case the User falls under any of the events
described in the following items, the Licensor may
immediately terminate this Agreement or claim that
the User compensates for the damage incurred by
the Licensor due to such event:
(1) when the User violated any provision of this
Agreement; or
(2) when a petition has been filed against the User
for an attachment, provisional attachment,
provisional disposition or any other compulsory
execution.
182 Software License Agreement
Others
Article 9 Destruction of the Licensed Software
If this Agreement is terminated pursuant to the
provision of Article 8, the User shall destroy the
Licensed Software, any related documents and
copies thereof within two (2) weeks from such date
of termination.
Article 10 Export Restriction
1. The User shall understand that the Licensed
Software shall be subject to the export restrictions
adopted by the country of User and any other
countries.
2. The User shall agree that the software will be
subject to any and all applicable international and
domestic laws including the export control regulation
of the country of User and any other countries, and
any restrictions concerning the end-users, the use
by end-users and importing countries to be provided
by the country of User and any other countries, and
any other governmental authorities.
3. If the User is an agency of the United States of
America (the “Government”), the User acknowledge
Licensor’s representation that the Licensed
Software is a “Commercial Item” as defined in
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) part 2.101(g)
consisting unpublished “Commercial Computer
Software” as those items are used at FAR part
12.212 and is only license the User with the same
use right Licensor grants all commercial end users
pursuant to the terms of this Agreement.
Article 11 Miscellaneous
1. In the event any part of this Agreement is
invalidated by operation of law, the residual
provisions shall continue in force.
2. Matters not stipulated in this Agreement or any
ambiguity or question raised in the construction of
this Agreement shall be provided or settled upon
good-faith consultation between the Licensor and
the User.
3. The Licensor and the User hereby agree that this
Agreement is governed by the laws of Japan, and
any dispute arising from, and relating to the rights
and obligations under, this Agreement shall be
submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Tokyo
District Court for its first instance.
Important Notice
concerning the Software
Software License Attached to the Product :
The Software embedded in the Product is composed
of several independent software components, and in
each of such individual components (hereinafter the
“Licensed Software”), a copyright of either
JVC KENWOOD Corporation (hereinafter “JKC”) or
a third party subsists.
The Product uses the software component
designated in the End-User License Agreement that
was executed between JKC and a third party
(hereinafter “EULA”).
The Licensed Software covers those corresponding
to free software, and, as a condition of distribution of
the software component in executable format which
is based on the license granted under the GNU
General Public License or Lesser General Public
License (hereinafter “GPL/LGPL”), it requires an
availability of the source code for the relevant
component. Please refer to the following URL
concerning the distribution of the source code;
http://www3.jvckenwood.com/english/
download/gpl/index.html
Please note that we are unable to answer any inquiry
relating to the contents, etc. of the source code. In
addition, the Licensed Software includes the
software developed or created independently by
JKC and there exists an ownership of JKC in such
software and any accompanying documents, which
is protected by the Copyright Law, any international
treaties and other applicable laws. As to matters
concerning the handling by JKC of the software
components, please refer to the “Software License
Agreement” attached hereto. Please note that any
software component licensed under “EULA” which
is not subject to “GPL/LGPL”, and those developed
or created independently by JKC shall not be subject
to the requirement for provision of the source code.
The software component distributed under “GPL/
LGPL” shall be licensed to users without charge,
and, therefore, no warranty is given for such software
component, either express or implied, within the
scope of the applicable laws and regulations. Unless
otherwise permitted by applicable laws and
regulations or agreed in written form, none of the
owners of the copyright or persons entitled to alter or
redistribute the software component under the said
license shall have any liability for any type of damage
or loss resulting from the use of or inability to use
such software component. For further details of the
conditions of use of such software component or
matters required to be complied with, please refer to
the relevant “GPL/LGPL”.
Users are urged to read the details for the relevant
license carefully before using the software
component covered by “GPL/LGPL” and embedded
in the Product. Since the terms and conditions of
individual licenses are provided by parties other than
JKC, the original English version will be displayed by
the Product.
A
Turn on the power.
B
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button.
C
Select [Main Menu]
B
[System]
B
[System
Information]
B
[Open Source License].
Software License Agreement 183
Others
.
GY-HM200U/GY-HM200E/
GY-HM170U/GY-HM170E
4K MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
© 2015 JVC KENWOOD Corporation B5A-0573-00

Navigation menu